ESA VT130W Hardware Manual Download Page 300

Page: 300 / 976

CHAPTER 16

Video terminal VT505H

405.1200.037.2 - Rel.: 2.21 of 25/02/2008

16-18

and you will see

There is one of these pages for each communication port; movement

between the various pages is effected by pressing

From this page you can:

• Set the clock and the contrast
• Prepare the VT to receive the program

F10

PROG

ESC

Port

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

Ver

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

Addr VT

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

Error

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

Driver

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

TRAN

PAGE

Summary of Contents for VT130W

Page 1: ...Hardware Manual 405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 ...

Page 2: ...right to change the information contained in this document without notice The information represents no obligation on the part of the company All products referred to are covered by the appropri ate trademark and or copyright legislation ...

Page 3: ...ning development production installation and customer care All the products described in this manual comply with the following standards electromagnetic compatibility EMC emissions EN 61000 6 4 2001 immunity EN 61000 6 2 2001 and thus are in line with Council Directives 89 336 EEC 92 31 EEC 93 68 EEC Products bearing the mark cULus have been certified in compliance with UL 508 and CSA C22 2 N 14 M...

Page 4: ...ation to its products where these have undergone modification or been installed in ways not envisaged in this manual The simple application of an adhesive on any part of the terminal is considered to be a variation of the original product and thus implies the annulment of the marks of approval Table 0 1 Tests carried out for CE mark Immunity Disturbance characteristics Standard To disturbances Ele...

Page 5: ... environments aerospace equipment nuclear power control devices or aircraft control devices These kinds of applications require a higher level of safety and reliability Installation and wiring Strictly follow the wiring diagram and grounding recommendations con tained in this document in order to prevent any damaged to the VT or to the connected devices Do not use any voltage beyond the VT s speci...

Page 6: ...nlight Do not use the VT where strong jolting or excessive vibration can occur Do not use the VT where abrasive chemicals can evaporate or are present in the air Use only allowed chemical substances to clean the VT see User s Man ual chapter on cleaning Ensure that no metal debris falls into the VT This can cause fire mal function or incorrect device operation After turning the VT OFF please wait ...

Page 7: ...loads 1 2 Disturbance suppression circuit RC and DIODE 1 3 Power Supply Contents 2 1 Connection pins 2 2 Wiring 2 2 Connections to be avoided 2 2 Recommended connection 2 3 Video terminal VT50 Contents 3 1 Technical characteristics 3 2 Functions 3 4 Front face 3 8 Standard series rear view 3 9 CAN series rear view 3 10 Dimensions and Cut out 3 11 Accessories 3 12 Termination of CAN line 3 12 Trans...

Page 8: ...he display 5 17 Adjusting the brightness on the display 5 18 Video terminal VT150W Contents 6 1 Technical characteristics 6 2 Functions 6 4 Front view 6 8 Customizing label 6 10 Standard series rear view 6 11 CAN series rear view 6 12 Dimensions and Cut out 6 13 Accessories 6 14 Termination of CAN line 6 14 Transfer PC VT 6 15 Preparation for reception 6 15 Information relating to driver 6 17 Adju...

Page 9: ...Transfer PC VT 9 14 Preparation for reception 9 15 Information relating to driver 9 16 Adjusting the contrast on the display 9 17 Video terminal VT300W Contents 10 1 Technical characteristics 10 2 Functions 10 4 Front view 10 8 Customizing label 10 10 Standard series rear view 10 11 CAN series rear view 10 12 Dimensions and Cut out 10 13 Accessories 10 14 Termination of CAN line 10 14 Transfer PC ...

Page 10: ...4 Front view 13 8 Customizing label 13 10 Rear view 13 11 Dimensions and Cut out 13 12 Accessories 13 13 Transfer PC VT 13 13 Preparation for reception 13 14 Information relating to driver 13 16 Improving display color quality 13 20 Adjusting the contrast on the display 13 20 Video terminal VT155W Contents 14 1 Technical characteristics 14 2 Functions 14 4 Front view 14 8 Standard series rear view...

Page 11: ...es 16 12 Connection cable 16 12 Adjusting holding strap for grip 16 12 Calibration of Touch Screen 16 12 Transfer PC VT 16 15 Preparation for reception 16 15 Information relating to driver 16 17 Adjusting the contrast on the display 16 22 Video terminal VT505W Contents 17 1 Technical characteristics 17 2 Functions 17 4 Front view 17 8 Standard series rear view 17 9 CAN series rear view 17 10 Ether...

Page 12: ...ction cable 19 12 Adjusting holding strap for grip 19 12 Calibration of Touch Screen 19 12 Transfer PC VT 19 15 Preparation for reception 19 15 Information relating to driver 19 18 Improving display color quality 19 23 Adjusting the contrast on the display 19 23 Video terminal VT525W Contents 20 1 Technical characteristics 20 2 Functions 20 4 Front view 20 8 Standard series rear view 20 9 Profibus...

Page 13: ...ansfer PC VT 22 11 Preparation for reception 22 12 Information relating to driver 22 13 Improving display color quality 22 18 Adjusting the contrast on the display 22 18 Video terminal VT565W Contents 23 1 Technical characteristics 23 2 Functions 23 4 Front view 23 8 Rear view 23 9 Dimensions and Cut out 23 10 Accessories 23 11 Transfer PC VT 23 11 Preparation for reception 23 12 Information relat...

Page 14: ...ermination of CAN line 25 17 Introducing the MAC address 25 18 Transfer PC VT 25 21 Preparation for reception 25 21 Information relating to driver 25 23 Improving display color quality 25 29 Adjusting the contrast on the display 25 29 Video terminal VT585W Contents 26 1 Technical characteristics 26 2 Functions 26 4 Front view 26 8 Customizing label 26 9 Standard series rear view 26 10 CAN series r...

Page 15: ...ofibus DP series rear view 28 10 CAN series rear view 28 11 Ethernet series rear view 28 12 Dimensions and Cut out 28 13 Accessories 28 14 Calibration of Touch Screen 28 14 Termination of CAN line 28 17 Introducing the MAC address 28 18 Transfer PC VT 28 21 Preparation for reception 28 21 Information relating to driver 28 23 Improving display color quality 28 29 Adjusting the contrast on the displ...

Page 16: ...essories Contents 34 1 1 2AA Battery 34 4 Cell battery 34 4 Flash module 34 5 Fixing hook for Hand Held 34 8 Interface for connecting Hand Held with MSP ASP 15L 34 9 Memory card 34 13 Memory module 34 18 Integrated Interbus S module 34 19 Integrated Profibus DP module 34 21 RS485 Serial module 34 21 Protfilm4 6 6H 10 12 34 22 Interbus S and Profibus DP card 34 27 Connection card for PC NET 34 34 A...

Page 17: ...ion software 35 25 CAN Connection 35 25 Operation of terminal with keyboard Contents 36 1 Changing value of variable field 36 3 Total change 36 4 Partial change 36 4 Examples of varying fields 36 4 Displaying messages 36 9 Information messages 36 9 VT50 info messages 36 10 VT60 info messages 36 10 VT130W info messages 36 11 VT150W VT160W info messages 36 12 VT170W info messages 36 12 VT190W info m...

Page 18: ...Help messages 37 33 Help and information messages relating to alarms 37 34 Help messages relating to project pages 37 35 Data exchange area Contents 38 1 Status area for the terminal 38 3 Status area for internal LEDs 38 8 Status area for external LEDs 38 12 Status area for recipes 38 14 Status area for internal keys 38 15 Status area for external keys 38 23 Status area for internal keys Real Time...

Page 19: ...41 8 ALLEN BRADLEY DRIVE 41 9 ATLAS COPCO DRIVE 41 10 BERGER LAHR DRIVE 41 11 CONTROL TECHNIQUES DRIVE 41 11 DANFOSS DRIVE 41 12 ELAU DRIVE 41 13 EUROTHERM DRIVE 41 14 EVER DRIVE 41 15 FANUC ROBOTICS DRIVE 41 15 FAGOR DRIVE 41 16 GALIL DRIVE 41 17 GE DRIVE 41 17 HITACHI DRIVE 41 17 KEB DRIVE 41 18 INDRAMAT DRIVE 41 19 LENZE DRIVE 41 19 LUST DRIVE 41 20 OMRON DRIVE 41 21 OSAI DRIVE 41 21 PANASONIC ...

Page 20: ...I PLC 41 56 OMRON PLC 41 58 SAIA PLC 41 60 SATT CONTROL PLC 41 64 SCHLEICHER PLC 41 65 SIEMENS PLC 41 66 SPRECHER SCHUH PLC 41 69 SQUARE D PLC 41 69 TELEMECANIQUE PLC 41 70 TEXAS INSTRUMENTS PLC 41 74 TOSHIBA PLC 41 76 HBM BALANCE SCALES 41 77 ASCON THERMOREGULATOR 41 78 GEFRAN THERMOREGULATOR 41 78 HENGSTLER THERMOREGULATOR 41 79 WEST THERMOREGULATOR 41 80 Cable information summary 41 81 Resistan...

Page 21: ...ns concepts and examples necessary to be able to install quickly and easily Conventions Below are listed the symbols and styles found in the manual together with their respective meanings PLC Programmable logic control or other intelligent device equipped with a serial connection Device Intelligent device or PLC equipped with a serial connec tion The contents of the bracket appears on the screen I...

Page 22: ......

Page 23: ...tive process The informa tion can be in the form of an Alarm an Information Info Message or in binary data format The VTs can be divided into two groups those with a keyboard and those without but equipped with a Touch Screen All VTs can be supplemented with accessories to boost and broaden their performance VTs are connected to the device by means of a serial connection For the VT to function a p...

Page 24: ......

Page 25: ...tinct types one with a passive matrix called STN Super Twist Nematic and the other with an active matrix called TFT Thin Film Transistor Some of their working features are the same others depend on the different constructional technology One component that requires particular care when being used is the Touch Screen Below we set out a series of points relating to possible behaviors and the correct...

Page 26: ...e angles in relation to the viewing point The table gives the value of the viewing angles depend ing on the type of display This feature means a difference in viewing albeit with the same contrast and temperature levels when The viewer is taller than the person setting the contrast Viewers find themselves at different distances from the VT Two identical displays may have slightly different brightn...

Page 27: ...ate color streaks This effect can be slightly corrected using the display s contrast control Brightness may present a slight tremble or irregularity leading to a slight darkening which extends over the entire display Graphic terminals TFT In some cases the display may have some pixels that are white always ON or black always OFF This phenomenon may be visible or invisi ble to the user on account o...

Page 28: ...ss is put together this area is very sensitive to pressure and is fragile The peripheral area is about 2mm on each side and is outside the touch sensitive area Subject this area to stress may damage the VT 2mm 2mm Useable area Peripheral area ...

Page 29: ...omagnetic compatibility EMC Contents Page Laying cables 1 2 Shielding of cables 1 2 Earthing of shielding and electronic circuits 1 2 Switching of capacitive loads 1 2 Switching off inductive loads 1 2 Disturbance suppression circuit RC and DIODE 1 3 This chapter consists of 4 pages ...

Page 30: ...nal ground must be earthed but it is best to separate the ground of the shields and cir cuits from that of the power circuits Note that the earth can only perform its function if the Resistance of the earth circuit is within the max limits prescribed Switching of capacitive loads The current peaks which occur when capacitive loads are switched on can damage or destroy control devices Furthermore t...

Page 31: ...the load Switch off time delay very low Optimal suppression is obtained as a direct consequence of a significant de energizing delay The effectiveness of the disturbance suppression is not affected by the volt age value No switch on delay The presence of the capacitor causes a high load current peak when switching on and can cause pasting of the con tact if undersized Suitable for both AC and DC n...

Page 32: ......

Page 33: ...405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 2 1 Chapter 2 Power Supply Contents Page Connection pins 2 2 Wiring 2 2 Connections to be avoided 2 2 Recommended connection 2 3 This chapter consists of 4 pages ...

Page 34: ...d 7 5mm 0 24 0 30in The recom mended screw grip pressure is 0 79Nm 7 lb in These values represent the maximum values certificated The screw grip pressure is related to the norms applicable to the prod uct and to the type of use Connections to be avoided The connections illustrated below must not be made as they may cause the VT to be damaged The above configurations will seriously damage certain c...

Page 35: ... as the 0V supply of the VT The circulation of current between the 0V supply and the earth of the communication ports could damage certain com ponents of the VT or of the devices connected it Recommended connection We recommend a wiring scheme as set out below in the interests of avoid ing damaging the VT Correct earthing is essential Table 2 3 Power supply with 0Vdc connected to PE 24V 3 24V PE 0...

Page 36: ......

Page 37: ...nctions 3 8 Front face 3 8 Standard series rear view 3 9 CAN series rear view 3 10 Dimensions and Cut out 3 11 Accessories 3 12 Termination of CAN line 3 12 Transfer PC VT 3 12 Preparation for reception 3 13 Information relating to driver 3 14 Adjusting the contrast on the display 3 14 This chapter consists of 14 pages ...

Page 38: ...s 2 x 20 Display area size mm 73 5 x 11 5 Character matrix in text mode pixels 5 x 7 Character size mm 3 2 x 5 5 Contrast adjustment Trimmer Automatic compensation with temperature Character sets Ascii Katakana Backlighting Type LED CCFL lamp Minimum lamp life at 25 C hours Keyboard Non customizable function keys 5 Customizable function keys Function key LEDs Alphanumeric keys Operational keys 8 O...

Page 39: ...n Optoisolated interface Ethernet 10 100Mbit RJ45 Universal Bus Connector Optional See table Chapter 34 Proprietary networks ESA Net Network server Network client Technical data Power supply 24Vdc 18 32Vdc Power absorbed at 24Vdc 5W Protection fuse Ø5x20mm 315mA Quick Blow F Protection level IP65 front end Operating temperature 0 50 C Storage and transportation temperature 20 60 C Humidity non con...

Page 40: ...pe from data memory Command Modify password Command Next page Command Page help Command Password login Command Password logout Command Previous page Command Print alarm history Command Printer form feed Command Quit project Command Report Command Restarts reading time sampled trend Command Run pipeline Command Save alarms history and trend buffers in flash Command Save recipe in data memory Comman...

Page 41: ...ion Disables key Function Go to page Function Internal command Function Invert bit value Function Macro Function None Function Reset bit permanently Function Reset real time bit Function Sequences Function Sets bit permanently Function Sets real time bit Function Value structure direct command Global configuration of E keys Global configuration of F keys Headers and footers Total Number of fields ...

Page 42: ...s of ESANET network Number Total bytes Recipe field for recipe structure Recipes Number of variables per recipe Rectangles Redefinable characters 7 Reports Sequences Random 64 Sequences Start stop Static bitmaps Symbolic field Bit group structured dynamic bitmaps Symbolic field Single bit structured dynamic bitmaps Symbolic field Value structured dynamic bitmaps System messages System variables as...

Page 43: ... Variables Limit values and linear scaling variables 12 x pages Variables Movement variable Mobile symbolic field Variables Threshold variables Variables Floating Point numerical variables Variables Numerical variables DEC HEX BIN BCD Variables String variables ASCII Table 3 1 Functions and objects realizable with this VT Part 4 of 4 Code of terminal VT050 Objects Functions Quantity Unless otherwi...

Page 44: ... page Start in putting Moving cursor between fields Moving cursor between fields Quits setting of data info messages directory of sequences communication driver Displays information messages Displays according to context info message help or page help Shift F2 F3 F4 F1 Esc Help Info F5 VT50 1 2 Shift F5 Help Info F4 F3 F2 F1 Esc Shift Info Shift Help ...

Page 45: ...405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 3 9 Standard series rear view Position Function A Power supply connector B MSP serial port C Trimmer for adjusting display contrast B A C ...

Page 46: ...ideo terminal VT50 405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 3 10 CAN series rear view Position Function A Power supply connector B ASP 8 serial port C Trimmer for adjusting display contrast D CAN serial port A B C D ...

Page 47: ...405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 3 11 Dimensions and Cut out ...

Page 48: ...s the termination resistances of the serial line typically 120 ohms which can be inserted by means of a jumper preset on 1 2 line not termi nated To activate the termination Make sure the device is not connected to the power supply Remove the cover Identify the jumper unit J2 Position the jumper between pins 2 and 3 line terminated Replace the back cover Reconnect the power supply Transfer PC VT F...

Page 49: ...tween the PC and the VT Switch on the VT with held down and wait a moment VT terminal with no Modem function The following mask appears The VT is now ready to receive refer to Software Manual for transfer procedure VT terminal with Modem function The following mask appears Choose the required transfer mode MODEM if you intend to use a modem or PC if you intend to use a serial port press the corres...

Page 50: ...e you will see The possible error messages are PROT ERROR Problem Errors have been detected in the data exchange between the VT and the Device Solution Check the cable there may be disturbance COM BROK Problem Communication between VT and Device interrupted Solution Check the serial connection cable An error message followed by indicates that the error is not currently present but was and has sinc...

Page 51: ...nctions 4 4 Front view 4 8 Standard series rear view 4 9 CAN series rear view 4 10 Dimensions and Cut out 4 11 Accessories 4 12 Termination of CAN line 4 12 Transfer PC VT 4 12 Preparation for reception 4 13 Information relating to driver 4 14 Adjusting the contrast on the display 4 15 This chapter consists of 16 pages ...

Page 52: ...4 x 20 Display area size mm 70 4 x 20 8 Character matrix in text mode pixels 5 x 7 Character size mm 2 95 x 4 75 Contrast adjustment Trimmer Automatic compensation with temperature Character sets Ascii Katakana Backlighting Type LED CCFL lamp Minimum lamp life at 25 C hours Keyboard Non customizable function keys 4 Customizable function keys Function key LEDs Alphanumeric keys Operational keys 6 O...

Page 53: ...n Optoisolated interface Ethernet 10 100Mbit RJ45 Universal Bus Connector Optional See table Chapter 34 Proprietary networks ESA Net Network server Network client Technical data Power supply 24Vdc 18 32Vdc Power absorbed at 24Vdc 5W Protection fuse Ø5x20mm 315mA Quick Blow F Protection level IP65 front end Operating temperature 0 50 C Storage and transportation temperature 20 60 C Humidity non con...

Page 54: ...pe from data memory Command Modify password Command Next page Command Page help Command Password login Command Password logout Command Previous page Command Print alarm history Command Printer form feed Command Quit project Command Report Command Restarts reading time sampled trend Command Run pipeline Command Save alarms history and trend buffers in flash Command Save recipe in data memory Comman...

Page 55: ...ion Disables key Function Go to page Function Internal command Function Invert bit value Function Macro Function None Function Reset bit permanently Function Reset real time bit Function Sequences Function Sets bit permanently Function Sets real time bit Function Value structure direct command Global configuration of E keys Global configuration of F keys Headers and footers Total Number of fields ...

Page 56: ...s of ESANET network Number Total bytes Recipe field for recipe structure Recipes Number of variables per recipe Rectangles Redefinable characters 7 Reports Sequences Random 64 Sequences Start stop Static bitmaps Symbolic field Bit group structured dynamic bitmaps Symbolic field Single bit structured dynamic bitmaps Symbolic field Value structured dynamic bitmaps System messages System variables as...

Page 57: ... Variables Limit values and linear scaling variables 12 x pages Variables Movement variable Mobile symbolic field Variables Threshold variables Variables Floating Point numerical variables Variables Numerical variables DEC HEX BIN BCD Variables String variables ASCII Table 4 1 Functions and objects realizable with this VT Part 4 of 4 Code of terminal VT060 Objects Functions Quantity Unless otherwi...

Page 58: ...irms setting Page up Page down Move cursor between fields Quits setting of data information messages sequence direc tory communication driver Displays information messages Displays according to context info message help or page help Shift F2 F3 F4 Enter F1 Help Esc VT60 1 2 Shift F4 Enter F1 F2 F3 Help Esc Help Esc Shift Help Esc ...

Page 59: ...405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 4 9 Standard series rear view Position Function A Power supply connector B MSP serial port C Trimmer for adjusting display contrast B A C ...

Page 60: ...ideo terminal VT60 405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 4 10 CAN series rear view Position Function A Power supply connector B ASP 8 serial port C Trimmer for adjusting display contrast D CAN serial port A B C D ...

Page 61: ...405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 4 11 Dimensions and Cut out ...

Page 62: ...s the termination resistances of the serial line typically 120 ohms which can be inserted by means of a jumper preset on 1 2 line not termi nated To activate the termination Make sure the device is not connected to the power supply Remove the cover Identify the jumper unit J2 Position the jumper between pins 2 and 3 line terminated Replace the back cover Reconnect the power supply Transfer PC VT F...

Page 63: ...n between the PC and the VT Switch on the VT with pressed down and wait a moment VT terminal with no Modem function The following mask appears The VT is now ready to receive refer to Software Manual for transfer procedure VT terminal with Modem function The following mask appears Choose the required transfer mode MODEM if you intend to use a modem or PC if you intend to use a serial port press the...

Page 64: ...rmation regards The name of the driver loaded The version of the driver loaded Network address of the VT Last error to have occurred To acquire this information carry out the following operations Be situated in any page of the project Press twice you now see The possible error messages are PROT ERROR Problem Errors have been detected in the data exchange between the VT and the Device Solution Chec...

Page 65: ...M BROK Adjusting the contrast on the display To improve the quality of the representation on the display it may be neces sary to adjust its contrast This can be done by rotating the trimmer C at the back of the VT see Page 4 9 or Page 4 10 turn it using a small screw driver or a trimmer tool in one direction and if the display quality wors ens turn it the other way ...

Page 66: ......

Page 67: ...Front view 5 8 Standard series rear view 5 10 Profibus DP series rear view 5 11 Dimensions and Cut out 5 12 Accessories 5 13 Transfer PC VT 5 13 Preparation for reception 5 14 Information relating to driver 5 15 Adjusting the contrast on the display 5 17 Adjusting the brightness on the display 5 18 This chapter consists of 18 pages ...

Page 68: ...TN LCD 16 Colors STN LCD 16 Colors TFT Representational format Graphic Resolution pixels 130 x 80 3 Rows by characters 10 x 26 5 x 13 2 x 6 Display area size mm 67 x 37 Character matrix in text mode pixels 6 x 8 12 x 16 24 x 32 Character size mm x 1 x 2 x 4 2 5 x 3 3 5 x 6 7 10 x 13 4 Contrast adjustment Software Automatic compensation with temperature Character sets Programmable fonts TTF Windows...

Page 69: ...able Chapter 34 Clock Clock Hardware with Supercapacitor Min 72h Typically130h Networks Integrated Profibus DP CAN Open Optoisolated interface Ethernet 10 100Mbit RJ45 Universal Bus Connector Optional See table Chapter 34 Proprietary networks ESA Net Network server Network client Technical data Power supply 24Vdc 18 32Vdc Power absorbed at 24Vdc 10W Protection fuse Self resetting Protection level ...

Page 70: ...rom data memory Command Modify password Command Next page Command Page help Command Password login Command Password logout Command Previous page Command Print alarm history Command Printer form feed Command Quit project Command Report Command Restarts reading time sampled trend Command Run pipeline Command Save alarms history and trend buffers in flash Command Save recipe in data memory Command Sa...

Page 71: ...nction Go to page Function Internal command Function Invert bit value Function Macro Function None Function Reset bit permanently Function Reset real time bit Function Sequences Function Sets bit permanently Function Sets real time bit Function Value structure direct command Global configuration of E keys Global configuration of F keys Headers and footers Total Number of fields per H F 64 128 Info...

Page 72: ...k Number Tolat bytes Recipe field for recipe structure Recipes Number of variables per recipe 128 256 Rectangles Redefinable characters Reports 32 Sequences Random 128 Sequences Start stop Static bitmaps Symbolic field Bit group structured dynamic bitmaps 1024 Symbolic field Single bit structured dynamic bitmaps Symbolic field Value structured dynamic bitmaps System messages System variables assig...

Page 73: ...t values and linear scaling variables 32 x pages Variables Movement variable Mobile symbolic field Variables Threshold variables Variables Floating Point numerical variables Variables Numerical variables DEC HEX BIN BCD Variables String variables ASCII Table 5 1 Functions and objects realizable with this VT Part 4 of 4 Code of terminal VT130W Objects Functions Quantity Unless otherwise stated ther...

Page 74: ...its dynamic text Moves the cursor between settable fields When in setting phase moves cursor to the left of the field Moves the cursor between settable fields When in setting phase moves cursor to the right of the field Quits setting of data info messages sequence directory com munication driver Shift 7 8 9 6 5 4 1 2 3 0 V W X Y Z M N O P Q R S T U J K L G H I D E F A B C Enter Pg Dn Pg Up Ack All...

Page 75: ...p In setting phase restores the initial value of the field Acknowledges all ISA alarms Displays info messages Displays History alarms Increase the display brightness Decrease the display brightness Normalise the display brightness Key Function A ck A ll A ck Info A larm H elp H ist Shift Esc C lr Shift A ck A ll A ck Shift Info A larm Shift H elp H ist Shift S pace Shift S pace ...

Page 76: ...30W 405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 5 10 Standard series rear view Position Function A Power supply connector B ASP serial port for communicating with PC or other devices C MSP serial port for communicating with PLC PC A C B ...

Page 77: ...37 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 5 11 Profibus DP series rear view Position Function A Power supply connector B ASP serial port for communicating with PC or other devices C Serial port for network communication A B C ...

Page 78: ...CHAPTER 5 Video terminal VT130W 405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 5 12 Dimensions and Cut out ...

Page 79: ...he instructions in the relevant chapter see Chapter 34 Video terminal accessories Transfer PC VT For everything to function properly the first time the VT operator terminal is switched on it needs to be correctly loaded that is it needs to have trans ferred to it Firmware Communication driver Project Given that the transfer of the three files in practice occurs with a single operation it will be d...

Page 80: ...together in either case wait a moment The function to press depends on which port you intend to use MSP ASP or MPI Transfer using MPI protocol Proceed from the preceding mask the following mask appears Press F2 function to set MPI address press F3 function to return to pre vious mask Press F1 function if you intend to start the transfer Trasfer using ASP or MSP port Proceed from the preceding mask...

Page 81: ...sponding func tion The VT is now ready to receive see Software Manual for the transfer Information relating to driver After the project has been transferred the VT can make available informa tion relating to what has been loaded The information regards Serial ports present The name of the driver loaded The version of the driver loaded Network address of the VT Last error to have occurred To acquir...

Page 82: ...CONTRAST option that is displayed in reverse colors and press the following mask will appear Use and or to effect any variation and for the confirmation To be able to set the clock use or to select the SET CLOCK option thatisdisplayedinreversecolorsandpress thefollowingmaskwillappear SERVICE PAGE Port xxxxxxxxxx Driver xxxxxxxxxx Version xxxxxxxxxx Addr VT xxxxxxxxxx Error xxxxxxxxxx ENT Set Clock...

Page 83: ... since disappeared Example COM BROKEN When is pressed you quit the display of information regarding the driver Adjusting the contrast on the display To improve the quality of the representation on the display it may be neces sary to adjust its contrast This can be done by going to the page proposed see Page 5 16 and changing the value from 31 to 31 in evidence at that moment Increase the value to ...

Page 84: ... the display To improve the quality of the representation on the display it may be neces sary to adjust its brightness This can be done by using and or and Press together to normalize the brightness To adjusting the brightnes you don t have to be in a context of set ting data Shift S hift S pace S pace ...

Page 85: ... Front view 6 8 Customizing label 6 10 Standard series rear view 6 11 CAN series rear view 6 12 Dimensions and Cut out 6 13 Accessories 6 14 Termination of CAN line 6 14 Transfer PC VT 6 15 Preparation for reception 6 15 Information relating to driver 6 17 Adjusting the contrast on the display 6 18 This chapter consists of 18 pages ...

Page 86: ...cteristics of the terminal VT150W 00000 VT150W 000DP VT150W A00CN Display Type LCD Representational format Text Rows by characters 4 x 20 Display area size mm 70 4 x 20 8 Character matrix in text mode pixels 5 x 7 Character size mm 2 95 x 4 75 Contrast adjustment Trimmer Automatic compensation with temperature Character sets Ascii Katakana Backlighting Type LED CCFL lamp Minimum lamp life at 25 C ...

Page 87: ...Chapter 34 Clock Clock Networks Integrated Profibus DP CAN Open Optoisolated interface Ethernet 10 100Mbit RJ45 Universal Bus Connector Optional See table Chapter 34 Proprietary networks ESA Net Network server Network client Technical data Power supply 24Vdc 18 32Vdc Power absorbed at 24Vdc 15W Protection fuse Ø5x20mm 800mA Quick Blow F Protection level IP65 front end Operating temperature 0 50 C ...

Page 88: ...cipe from data memory Command Modify password Command Next page Command Page help Command Password login Command Password logout Command Previous page Command Print alarm history Command Printer form feed Command Quit project Command Report Command Restarts reading time sampled trend Command Run pipeline Command Save alarms history and trend buffers in flash Command Save recipe in data memory Comm...

Page 89: ...n Disables key Function Go to page Function Internal command Function Invert bit value Function Macro Function None Function Reset bit permanently Function Reset real time bit Function Sequences Function Sets bit permanently Function Sets real time bit Function Value structure direct command Global configuration of E keys Global configuration of F keys Headers and footers Total Number of fields pe...

Page 90: ...bles of ESANET network Number Total bytes 128 1024 Recipe field for recipe structure Recipes Number of variables per recipe Rectangles Redefinable characters 7 Reports Sequences Random 64 Sequences Start stop Static bitmaps Symbolic field Bit group structured dynamic bitmaps Symbolic field Single bit structured dynamic bitmaps Symbolic field Value structured dynamic bitmaps System messages System ...

Page 91: ...Variables Limit values and linear scaling variables 32 x pages Variables Movement variable Mobile symbolic field Variables Threshold variables Variables Floating Point numerical variables Variables Numerical variables DEC HEX BIN BCD Variables String variables ASCII Table 6 1 Functions and objects realizable with this VT Part 4 of 4 Code of terminal VT150W Objects Functions Quantity Unless otherwi...

Page 92: ...ynamic text Page down When in setting phase edits dynamic Moves the cursor between settable fields When in setting phase moves cursor to the left of the field Moves the cursor between settable fields When in setting phase moves cursor to the right of the field shift 1 D E F 4 M N O 7 V W X 2 G H I 5 P Q R 8 Y Z 3 J K L 6 S T U 9 Enter 0 A B C Space VT150W F1 F6 F2 F7 F3 F8 F4 F9 F5 F10 Info Help P...

Page 93: ... of data info messages sequence directory com munication driver Displays info messages Displays according to context information message help or page help In setting phase restores the initial value of the field Key Function Esc Clr Info Help Shift Esc Clr ...

Page 94: ...thickness of the label must not exceed 125µm microme ters Do not use either stiff materials or glues Before starting to insert the customized label see Chapter 29 Inserting customized labels Position Function Dimensions L x H mm 1 ESA Logo 65 x 12 2 VT Model 65 x 12 3 F key customization F 116 x 16 3 2 1 ...

Page 95: ...dard series rear view Position Function A Power supply connector B Auxiliary port for connecting optional accessories C Trimmer for adjusting contrast of the display D MSP serial port E NETWORK serial port for network communication Option A C B D E ...

Page 96: ...7 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 6 12 CAN series rear view Position Function A Power supply connector B Auxiliary port for connecting optional accessories C Trimmer for adjusting contrast of the display D ASP 8 serial port E CAN serial port D E A C B ...

Page 97: ...405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 6 13 Dimensions and Cut out ...

Page 98: ... Accessories Any accessories should be mounted in accordance with the instructions in the relevant chapter see Chapter 34 Video terminal accessories Termination of CAN line This paragraph applies only to the CAN series The VT in question inte grates the termination resistances of the serial line typically 120 ohms which can be inserted by means of a jumper preset on 1 2 line not termi nated To act...

Page 99: ...ation driver Project Given that the transfer of the three files in practice occurs with a single operation it will be defined as Project transfer for the sake of simplicity For this it is essential that the VT be prepared to receive the transfer See also Chapter 38 Command area Preparation for reception The program VTWIN see Software Manual must be used for the transfer but the terminal must be se...

Page 100: ...oose the required transfer mode MODEM if you intend to use a modem or PC if you intend to use a serial port press the corresponding function If the choose made is PC the VT is ready to receive see Software Manual for transfer if on the other hand you choose MODEM the following mask will appear The choice should be according to the speed you intend to use for the trans fer Slow 9600bit sec or Fast ...

Page 101: ...of the project Press twice you will see Press or to display Possible error messages are PROT ERROR Problem Errors have been detected in the data exchange between the VT and the Device Solution Check the cable there may be disturbance COM BROKEN Problem Communication between VT and Device interrupted Solution Check the serial connection cable An error message followed by indicates that the error is...

Page 102: ...improve the quality of the representation on the display it may be neces sary to adjust its contrast This can be done by rotating the trimmer C at the back of the VT see Page 6 11 or Page 6 12 turn it using a small screwdriver or a trimmer tool in one direction and if the display quality worsens turn it the other way ...

Page 103: ...l characteristics 7 2 Functions 7 4 Front view 7 8 Customizing label 7 10 Rear view 7 11 Dimensions and Cut out 7 12 Accessories 7 13 Transfer PC VT 7 13 Preparation for reception 7 14 Information relating to driver 7 15 Adjusting the contrast on the display 7 16 This chapter consists of 16 pages ...

Page 104: ... Characteristics of the terminal VT160W 00000 VT160W 000DP Display Type LCD Representational format Text Rows by characters 4 x 20 Display area size mm 70 4 x 20 8 Character matrix in text mode pixels 5 x 7 Character size mm 2 95 x 4 75 Contrast adjustment Trimmer Automatic compensation with temperature Character sets Ascii Katakana Backlighting Type LED CCFL lamp Minimum lamp life at 25 C hours K...

Page 105: ...See table Chapter 34 Clock Clock Networks Integrated Profibus DP CAN Open Optoisolated interface Ethernet 10 100Mbit RJ45 Universal Bus Connector Optional See table Chapter 34 Proprietary ESA Net Network server Network client Technical data Power supply 24Vdc 18 32Vdc Power absorbed at 24Vdc 15W Protection fuse Ø5x20mm 800mA Quick Blow F Protection level IP65 front end Operating temperature 0 50 C...

Page 106: ...mory Command Modify password Command Next page Command Page help Command Password login Command Password logout Command Previous page Command Print alarm history Command Printer form feed Command Quit project Command Report Command Restarts reading time sampled trend Command Run pipeline Command Save alarms history and trend buffers in flash Command Save recipe in data memory Command Save recipe r...

Page 107: ...unction Go to page Function Internal command Function Invert bit value Function Macro Function None Function Reset bit permanently Function Reset real time bit Function Sequences Function Sets bit permanently Function Sets real time bit Function Value structure direct command Global configuration of E keys Global configuration of F keys Headers and footers Total Number of fields per H F Info messa...

Page 108: ...k Number Total bytes 128 1024 Recipe field for recipe structure Recipes Number of variables per recipe Rectangles Redefinable characters 7 Reports Sequences Random 64 Sequences Start stop Static bitmaps Symbolic field Bit group structured dynamic bitmaps Symbolic field Single bit structured dynamic bitmaps Symbolic field Value structured dynamic bitmaps System messages System variables assigned to...

Page 109: ...values and linear scaling variables 32 x pages Variables Movement variable Mobile symbolic field Variables Threshold variables Variables Floating Point numerical variables Variables Numerical variables DEC HEX BIN BCD Variables String variables ASCII Table 7 1 Functions and objects realizable with this VT Part 4 of 4 Code of terminal VT160W Objects Functions Quantity Unless otherwise stated there ...

Page 110: ...op button 6 Customizing label for command and or signal elements 7 16mm diameter pre cuts for mounting command and or signal elements 8 E key customizing label 9 E keys Opens and confirms input Page up When in setting phase edits dynamic text shift 1 D E F 4 M N O 7 V W X 2 G H I 5 P Q R 8 Y Z 3 J K L 6 S T U 9 Enter 0 A B C Space VT160W F1 F6 F2 F7 F3 F8 F4 F9 F5 F10 Info Help PgUp PgDn Esc Clr 2...

Page 111: ... field Moves the cursor between settable fields When in setting phase moves cursor to the right of the field Quits setting of data info messages sequence directory com munication driver Displays info messages Displays according to context information message help or page help In setting phase restores the initial value of the field Key Function PgDn Esc Clr Info Help Shift Esc Clr ...

Page 112: ...microme ters Do not use either stiff materials or glues Before starting to insert the customized label see Chapter 29 Inserting customized labels Position Function Dimensions L x H mm 1 ESA Logo VT Model 101 x 13 2 F key customization F 118 x 18 3 Customizing label for command and or signal elements 112 x 8 4 F key customization E 149 x 16 1 2 3 4 ...

Page 113: ... 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 7 11 Rear view Position Function A Power supply connector B Trimmer for adjusting contrast of the display C MSP serial port D NETWORK serial port for network communication Optional A B C D ...

Page 114: ...CHAPTER 7 Video terminal VT160W 405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 7 12 Dimensions and Cut out ...

Page 115: ...he instructions in the relevant chapter see Chapter 34 Video terminal accessories Transfer PC VT For everything to function properly the first time the VT operator terminal is switched on it needs to be correctly loaded that is it needs to have trans ferred to it Firmware Communication driver Project Given that the transfer of the three files in practice occurs with a single operation it will be d...

Page 116: ... press together in either case wait a moment VT terminal with no Modem function The following mask appears The VT is now ready to receive refer to Software Manual for transfer procedure VT terminal with Modem function The following mask appears Choose the required transfer mode MODEM if you intend to use a modem or PC if you intend to use a serial port press the corresponding function If the choos...

Page 117: ...ed The version of the driver loaded Network address of the VT Last error to have occurred To acquire this information carry out the following operations Be situated in any page of the project Press twice you will see Press or to display Possible error messages are PR ERROR Problem Errors have been detected in the data exchange between the VT and the Device Solution Check the cable there may be dis...

Page 118: ...disappeared Example COM BROKEN Adjusting the contrast on the display To improve the quality of the representation on the display it may be neces sary to adjust its contrast This can be done by rotating the trimmer C at the back of the VT see Page 7 11 turn it using a small screwdriver or a trimmer tool in one direction and if the display quality worsens turn it the other way ...

Page 119: ...l characteristics 8 2 Functions 8 4 Front view 8 8 Customizing label 8 10 Rear view 8 11 Dimensions and Cut out 8 13 Accessories 8 14 Transfer PC VT 8 14 Preparation for reception 8 15 Information relating to driver 8 16 Adjusting the contrast on the display 8 17 This chapter consists of 18 pages ...

Page 120: ...0 Esc Clr Code of terminal Characteristics of the terminal VT170W A0000 Display Type LCD Representational format Text Rows by characters 4 x 20 Display area size mm 70 4 x 20 8 Character matrix in text mode pixels 5 x 7 Character size mm 2 95 x 4 75 Contrast adjustment Trimmer Automatic compensation with temperature Character sets Ascii Katakana Backlighting Type LED CCFL lamp Minimum lamp life at...

Page 121: ... See table Chapter 34 Clock Clock Hardware With back up battery Networks Integrated Profibus DP CAN Open Optoisolated interface Ethernet 10 100Mbit RJ45 Universal Bus Connector Optional See table Chapter 34 Proprietary networks ESA Net Network server Network client Technical data Power supply 24Vdc 18 32Vdc Power absorbed at 24Vdc 9W Protection fuse Ø5x20mm 500mA Quick Blow F Protection level IP65...

Page 122: ...Load recipe from data memory Command Modify password Command Next page Command Page help Command Password login Command Password logout Command Previous page Command Print alarm history Command Printer form feed Command Quit project Command Report Command Restarts reading time sampled trend Command Run pipeline Command Save alarms history and trend buffers in flash Command Save recipe in data memo...

Page 123: ...n Disables key Function Go to page Function Internal command Function Invert bit value Function Macro Function None Function Reset bit permanently Function Reset real time bit Function Sequences Function Sets bit permanently Function Sets real time bit Function Value structure direct command Global configuration of E keys Global configuration of F keys Headers and footers Total Number of fields pe...

Page 124: ...ESANET network Number Total bytes 128 1024 Recipe field for recipe structure Recipes Number of variables per recipe 1024 256 Rectangles Redefinable characters 7 Reports 128 Sequences Random 128 Sequences Start stop Static bitmaps Symbolic field Bit group structured dynamic bitmaps Symbolic field Single bit structured dynamic bitmaps Symbolic field Value structured dynamic bitmaps System messages S...

Page 125: ...ariables Limit values and linear scaling variables 16 x pages Variables Movement variable Mobile symbolic field Variables Threshold variables Variables Floating Point numerical variables Variables Numerical variables DEC HEX BIN BCD Variables String variables ASCII Table 8 1 Functions and objects realizable with this VT Part 4 of 4 Code of terminal VT170W Objects Functions Quantity Unless otherwis...

Page 126: ...nication error is detected 5 Power LED Lights up when power in ON 6 Battery LED Lights up when the battery has nearly run out Start input Confirms setting of data shift 1 D E F 4 M N O 7 V W X 2 G H I 5 P Q R 8 Y Z 3 J K L 6 S T U 9 Enter 0 A B C Space VT170W Help Info Alarm Ack Ack All PgUp PgDn F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Battery Power X0 Esc Clr 5 4 6 2 1 3 Enter ...

Page 127: ...ing phase moves cursor to the right of the field Quits setting of data info messages sequence directory com munication driver Displays info messages Displays ISA alarms Displays according to context information message help alarm help or page help Acknowledgment of ISA alarms on display Print the entire display area In setting phase restores the initial value of the field Acknowledges all ISA alar...

Page 128: ...thickness of the label must not exceed 125µm microme ters Do not use either stiff materials or glues Before starting to insert the customized label see Chapter 29 Inserting customized labels Position Function Dimensions L x H mm 1 ESA Logo 57 x 10 2 VT Model 57 x 10 3 F key customization F 116 x 14 1 2 3 ...

Page 129: ...405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 8 11 Rear view A B G H D C F E ...

Page 130: ...usting display contrast B Battery compartment C NETWORK1 serial port for network communication Optional D ASP 9 serial port for communicating with PC or other devices E Power supply connector F Fuse holder G MSP serial port for communicating with PLC PC H NETWORK2 serial port for network communication Optional ...

Page 131: ...405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 8 13 Dimensions and Cut out ...

Page 132: ...ccordance with the instructions in the relevant chapter see Chapter 34 Video terminal accessories Transfer PC VT For everything to function properly the first time the VT operator terminal is switched on it needs to be correctly loaded that is it needs to have trans ferred to it Firmware Communication driver Project Given that the transfer of the three files in practice occurs with a single operat...

Page 133: ... port to be used The VT is now ready to receive refer to Software Man ual for transfer procedure VT terminal with Modem function Proceed from the preceding mask the following mask appears Choose the required transfer mode MODEM if you intend to use a modem or PC if you intend to use a serial port press the corresponding function If the choose made is PC the VT is ready to receive see Software Manu...

Page 134: ...information regards The name of the driver loaded The version of the driver loaded Network address of the VT Last error to have occurred To acquire this information carry out the following operations Be situated in any page of the project Press twice you will see Press or you will see While displaying this page press to access the clock setting page For the clock to be used properly a special batt...

Page 135: ...interrupted Solution Check the serial connection cable An error message followed by indicates that the error is not currently present but was and has since disappeared Example COM BROKEN By pressing you pass back to the project page Adjusting the contrast on the display To improve the quality of the representation on the display it may be neces sary to adjust its contrast This can be done by rotat...

Page 136: ......

Page 137: ...l characteristics 9 2 Functions 9 4 Front view 9 8 Customizing label 9 10 Rear view 9 11 Dimensions and Cut out 9 13 Accessories 9 14 Transfer PC VT 9 14 Preparation for reception 9 15 Information relating to driver 9 16 Adjusting the contrast on the display 9 17 This chapter consists of 18 pages ...

Page 138: ...are F23 F24 PgUp PgDn Esc Clr Code of terminal Characteristics of the terminal VT190W A0000 VT190W AP000 Display Type LCD Representational format Text Rows by characters 4 x 40 Display area size mm 140 5 x 23 2 Character matrix in text mode pixels 5 x 7 Character size mm 2 8 x 4 9 Contrast adjustment Software Automatic compensation with temperature Character sets Ascii Katakana Backlighting Type L...

Page 139: ...able Chapter 34 Clock Clock Hardware With back up battery Networks Integrated Profibus DP CAN Open Optoisolated interface Ethernet 10 100Mbit RJ45 Universal Bus Connector Optional See table Chapter 34 Proprietary networks ESA Net Network server Network client Technical data Power supply 24Vdc 18 32Vdc Power absorbed at 24Vdc 9W Protection fuse Ø5x20mm 800mA Quick Blow F Protection level IP65 front...

Page 140: ...Load recipe from data memory Command Modify password Command Next page Command Page help Command Password login Command Password logout Command Previous page Command Print alarm history Command Printer form feed Command Quit project Command Report Command Restarts reading time sampled trend Command Run pipeline Command Save alarms history and trend buffers in flash Command Save recipe in data memo...

Page 141: ...n Disables key Function Go to page Function Internal command Function Invert bit value Function Macro Function None Function Reset bit permanently Function Reset real time bit Function Sequences Function Sets bit permanently Function Sets real time bit Function Value structure direct command Global configuration of E keys Global configuration of F keys Headers and footers Total Number of fields pe...

Page 142: ... of ESANET network Number Total bytes 128 1024 Recipe field for recipe structure Recipes Number of variables per recipe 1024 256 Rectangles Redefinable characters 7 Reports 128 Sequences Random 128 Sequences Start stop Static bitmaps Symbolic field Bit group structured dynamic bitmaps Symbolic field Single bit structured dynamic bitmaps Symbolic field Value structured dynamic bitmaps System messag...

Page 143: ...ariables Limit values and linear scaling variables 32 x pages Variables Movement variable Mobile symbolic field Variables Threshold variables Variables Floating Point numerical variables Variables Numerical variables DEC HEX BIN BCD Variables String variables ASCII Table 9 1 Functions and objects realizable with this VT Part 4 of 4 Code of terminal VT190W Objects Functions Quantity Unless otherwis...

Page 144: ... 6 Battery LED Lights up when the battery has nearly run out 7 Alphanumeric keys Starts input Confirms setting of data Page up When in setting phase edits dynamic text shift 1 D E F 4 M N O 7 V W X 2 G H I 5 P Q R 8 Y Z 3 J K L 6 S T U 9 Enter 0 A B C Space VT190W Help Info Alarm Ack Ack All F12 Battery Power X0 F13 F1 F2 F14 F15 F3 F4 F16 F17 F5 F6 F18 F19 F7 F8 F20 F9 F21 F22 F10 F11 Spare F23 F...

Page 145: ...t of the field Quits setting of data info messages sequence directory com munication driver Displays info messages Displays ISA alarms Displays according to context information message help alarm help or page help Acknowledgment of ISA alarms on display Print the entire display area No predefined function In setting phase restores the initial value of the field Acknowledges all ISA alarms Key Func...

Page 146: ...t exceed 125µm microme ters Do not use either stiff materials or glues Before starting to insert the customized label see Chapter 29 Inserting customized labels Position Function Dimensions L x H mm 1 ESA Logo 73 x 10 2 F key customization F1 F5 F12 F16 116 x 15 3 VT Model 73 x 10 4 F key customization F6 F11 F17 F22 134 x 15 2 1 4 3 ...

Page 147: ...405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 9 11 Rear view A E B C F D H G ...

Page 148: ...ent B Power supply connector C Fuse holder D MSP serial port for communicating with PLC PC E ASP 9 serial port for communicating with PC or other devices F LPT port for connecting printer Optional G NETWORK2 serial port for network communication Optional H NETWORK1 serial port for network communication Optional ...

Page 149: ...405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 9 13 Dimensions and Cut out ...

Page 150: ...ccordance with the instructions in the relevant chapter see Chapter 34 Video terminal accessories Transfer PC VT For everything to function properly the first time the VT operator terminal is switched on it needs to be correctly loaded that is it needs to have trans ferred to it Firmware Communication driver Project Given that the transfer of the three files in practice occurs with a single operat...

Page 151: ...function corresponding to the port to be used The VT is now ready to receive refer to Software Man ual for transfer procedure VT terminal with Modem function Proceed from the preceding mask the following mask appears Choose the required transfer mode MODEM if you intend to use a modem or PC if you intend to use a serial port press the corresponding function If the choose made is PC the VT is ready...

Page 152: ...en loaded The information regards The name of the driver loaded The version of the driver loaded Network address of the VT Last error to have occurred To acquire this information carry out the following operations Be situated in any page of the project Press twice you will see Press or you will see If while displaying this page you press you will access the page for set ting the clock and the cont...

Page 153: ...tween VT and Device interrupted Solution Check the serial connection cable An error message followed by indicates that the error is not currently present but was and has since disappeared Example COM BROKEN By pressing you pass back to the project page Adjusting the contrast on the display To improve the quality of the representation on the display it may be neces sary to adjust its contrast This ...

Page 154: ......

Page 155: ...nt view 10 8 Customizing label 10 10 Standard series rear view 10 11 CAN series rear view 10 12 Dimensions and Cut out 10 13 Accessories 10 14 Termination of CAN line 10 14 Transfer PC VT 10 15 Preparation for reception 10 15 Information relating to driver 10 17 Adjusting the contrast on the display 10 20 This chapter consists of 20 pages ...

Page 156: ... A0000 VT300W AP000 VT300W 000CN Display Type LCD monochromatic STN LCD 16 Colors STN LCD 16 Colors TFT Representational format Graphic Resolution pixels 240 x 64 Rows by characters 8 x 40 4 x 20 2 x 10 Display area size mm 132 x 39 Character matrix in text mode pixels 6 x 8 12 x 16 24 x 32 Character size mm x 1 x 2 x 4 3 2 x 4 2 6 5 x 8 5 12 7 x 17 Contrast adjustment Software Automatic compensat...

Page 157: ...s See table Chapter 34 Clock Clock Hardware With back up battery Networks Integrated Profibus DP CAN Open Optoisolated interface Ethernet 10 100Mbit RJ45 Universal Bus Connector Optional See table Chapter 34 Proprietary networks ESA Net Network server Network client Technical data Power supply 24Vdc 18 32Vdc Power absorbed at 24Vdc 11W Protection fuse Ø5x20mm 800mA Quick Blow F Protection level IP...

Page 158: ... from data memory Command Modify password Command Next page Command Page help Command Password login Command Password logout Command Previous page Command Print alarm history Command Printer form feed Command Quit project Command Report Command Restarts reading time sampled trend Command Run pipeline Command Save alarms history and trend buffers in flash Command Save recipe in data memory Command ...

Page 159: ...ction Go to page Function Internal command Function Invert bit value Function Macro Function None Function Reset bit permanently Function Reset real time bit Function Sequences Function Sets bit permanently Function Sets real time bit Function Value structure direct command Global configuration of E keys Global configuration of F keys Headers and footers Total Number of fields per H F 128 128 Info...

Page 160: ...T network Number Tolat bytes 256 1024 Recipe field for recipe structure Recipes Number of variables per recipe 1024 256 Rectangles Redefinable characters Reports 128 Sequences Random 128 Sequences Start stop Static bitmaps Symbolic field Bit group structured dynamic bitmaps 1024 Symbolic field Single bit structured dynamic bitmaps Symbolic field Value structured dynamic bitmaps System messages Sys...

Page 161: ...iables Limit values and linear scaling variables 80 x pages Variables Movement variable Mobile symbolic field Variables Threshold variables Variables Floating Point numerical variables Variables Numerical variables DEC HEX BIN BCD Variables String variables ASCII Table 10 1 Functions and objects realizable with this VT Part 4 of 4 Code of terminal VT300W Objects Functions Quantity Unless otherwise...

Page 162: ...N 6 Battery LED Lights up when the battery has nearly run out 7 Alphanumeric keys Starts input Confirms setting of data Page up When in setting phase edits dynamic text shift 1 D E F 4 M N O 7 V W X 2 G H I 5 P Q R 8 Y Z 3 J K L 6 S T U 9 Enter 0 A B C Space VT300W Help Info Alarm Ack Ack All F12 Battery Power X0 F13 F1 F2 F14 F15 F3 F4 F16 F17 F5 F6 F18 F19 F7 F8 F20 F9 F21 F22 F10 F11 Spare F23 ...

Page 163: ...t of the field Quits setting of data info messages sequence directory com munication driver Displays info messages Displays ISA alarms Displays according to context information message help alarm help or page help Acknowledgment of ISA alarms on display Print the entire display area No predefined function In setting phase restores the initial value of the field Acknowledges all ISA alarms Key Func...

Page 164: ...ot exceed 125µm microme ters Do not use either stiff materials or glues Before starting to insert the customized label see Chapter 29 Inserting customized labels Position Function Dimensions L x H mm 1 ESA Logo 73 x 10 2 F key customization F1 F5 F12 F16 116 x 15 3 VT Model 73 x 10 4 F key customization F6 F11 F17 F22 134 x 15 2 1 4 3 ...

Page 165: ...r view Position Function A Auxiliary port for connecting optional accessories B Power supply connector C LPT port for connecting printer Optional D ASP serial port for communicating with PC or other devices E MSP serial port for communicating with PLC PC A D B E C ...

Page 166: ...1 of 25 02 2008 10 12 CAN series rear view Position Function A Auxiliary port for connecting optional accessories B Power supply connector C LPT port for connecting printer Optional D CAN serial port E MSP serial port for communicating with PLC PC A D B E C ...

Page 167: ...405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 10 13 Dimensions and Cut out ...

Page 168: ...r Accessories Any accessories should be mounted in accordance with the instructions in the relevant chapter see Chapter 34 Video terminal accessories Termination of CAN line This paragraph applies only to the CAN series The VT in question inte grates the termination resistances of the serial line typically 120 ohms which can be inserted by means of a jumper preset on 1 2 line not termi nated To ac...

Page 169: ... it will be defined as Project transfer for the sake of simplicity For this it is essential that the VT be prepared to receive the transfer See also Chapter 38 Command area Preparation for reception The program VTWIN see Software Manual must be used for the transfer but the terminal must be set up to receive This means carrying out the fol lowing steps Check that the VT is off Check that there is ...

Page 170: ...ing function If the choose made is PC the VT is ready to receive see Software Manual for transfer if on the other hand you choose MODEM the following mask will appear The choice should be according to the speed you intend to use for the transfer Slow 9600bit sec or Fast 38400bit sec press the corresponding function The VT is now ready to receive see Software Manual for the transfer VT300 TRANSFER ...

Page 171: ...ice you will see There is one of these pages for each communication port you can move between the various pages by pressing If you press while displaying this page you can access the page for set ting the clock and the contrast In order to access the contrast setting use or to select the SET CONTRAST option that is displayed in reverse colors and press the following mask will appear Shift Port xxx...

Page 172: ... battery has to be inserted in the terminal see Chapter 34 Video terminal accesso ries Use and or to select the field and and or to effect any variation use to confirm To use the Memory Card either switch on the VT with held down or if the VT is already on press together in both cases it will be nec essary to wait a moment before the following mask appears on the VT CONTRAST Up Down change Enter m...

Page 173: ...n Check the cable there may be disturbance COM BROKEN Problem Communication between VT and Device interrupted Solution Check the serial connection cable An error message followed by indicates that the error is not currently present but was and has since disappeared Example COM BROKEN When is pressed you quit the display of information regarding the driver VT300 TRANSFER PAGE Graphic controller BOO...

Page 174: ...isplay To improve the quality of the representation on the display it may be neces sary to adjust its contrast This can be done by going to the page proposed see Page 10 17 and changing the value from 31 to 32 in evidence at that moment Increase the value to darken the display to lighten it decrease the value ...

Page 175: ...aracteristics 11 2 Functions 11 4 Front view 11 8 Customizing label 11 10 Rear view 11 11 Dimensions and Cut out 11 13 Accessories 11 14 Transfer PC VT 11 14 Preparation for reception 11 15 Information relating to driver 11 16 Adjusting the contrast on the display 11 20 This chapter consists of 20 pages ...

Page 176: ...A0000 VT310W AP000 Display Type LCD monochromatic STN LCD 16 Colors STN LCD 16 Colors TFT Representational format Graphic Resolution pixels 240 x 128 5 5 Rows by characters 16 x 40 8 x 20 4 x 10 Display area size mm 123 x 68 Character matrix in text mode pixels 6 x 8 12 x 16 24 x 32 Character size mm x 1 x 2 x 4 3 x 4 6 x 8 12 x 16 Contrast adjustment Software Automatic compensation with temperatu...

Page 177: ...ries See table Chapter 34 Clock Clock Hardware With back up battery Networks Integrated Profibus DP CAN Open Optoisolated interface Ethernet 10 100Mbit RJ45 Universal Bus Connector Optional See table Chapter 34 Proprietary networks ESA Net Network server Network client Technical data Power supply 24Vdc 18 32Vdc Power absorbed at 24Vdc 11W Protection fuse Ø5x20mm 800mA Quick Blow F Protection level...

Page 178: ... from data memory Command Modify password Command Next page Command Page help Command Password login Command Password logout Command Previous page Command Print alarm history Command Printer form feed Command Quit project Command Report Command Restarts reading time sampled trend Command Run pipeline Command Save alarms history and trend buffers in flash Command Save recipe in data memory Command ...

Page 179: ...ction Go to page Function Internal command Function Invert bit value Function Macro Function None Function Reset bit permanently Function Reset real time bit Function Sequences Function Sets bit permanently Function Sets real time bit Function Value structure direct command Global configuration of E keys Global configuration of F keys Headers and footers Total Number of fields per H F 128 128 Info...

Page 180: ...ork Number Tolat bytes 256 1024 Recipe field for recipe structure Recipes Number of variables per recipe 1024 256 Rectangles Redefinable characters Reports 128 Sequences Random 128 Sequences Start stop Static bitmaps Symbolic field Bit group structured dynamic bitmaps 1024 Symbolic field Single bit structured dynamic bitmaps Symbolic field Value structured dynamic bitmaps System messages System va...

Page 181: ...iables Limit values and linear scaling variables 96 x pages Variables Movement variable Mobile symbolic field Variables Threshold variables Variables Floating Point numerical variables Variables Numerical variables DEC HEX BIN BCD Variables String variables ASCII Table 11 1 Functions and objects realizable with this VT Part 4 of 4 Code of terminal VT310W Objects Functions Quantity Unless otherwise...

Page 182: ...communication error is detected 7 Power LED Lights up when power in ON 8 Battery LED Lights up when the battery has nearly run out 9 Alphanumeric keys Starts input shift 1 D E F 4 M N O 7 V W X 2 G H I 5 P Q R 8 Y Z 3 J K L 6 S T U 9 Enter 0 A B C Space VT310W Help Info Alarm Ack Ack All F1 Battery Power X0 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 Spare F20 F21 PgUp PgDn Esc Clr F15 F14 F13 F12 F19 F18 F17...

Page 183: ...g phase moves cursor to the right of the field Quits setting of data info messages sequence directory com munication driver Displays info messages Displays ISA alarms Displays according to context information message help alarm help or page help Acknowledgment of ISA alarms on display Print the entire display area No predefined function In setting phase restores the initial value of the field Ackn...

Page 184: ...rs Do not use either stiff materials or glues Before starting to insert the customized label see Chapter 29 Inserting customized labels Position Function Dimensions L x H mm 1 F key customization F 16 x 92 2 ESA Logo 91 x 10 3 F key customization F1 F5 116 x 15 4 F key customization F 16 x 92 5 VT Model 91 x 10 6 F key customization F6 F11 134 x 15 3 2 1 6 5 4 ...

Page 185: ...405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 11 11 Rear view E C F D A B ...

Page 186: ...osition Function A Auxiliary port for connecting optional accessories B Trimmer for brightness control C Power supply connector D LPT port for connecting printer Optional E ASP serial port for communicating with PC or other devices F MSP serial port for communicating with PLC PC ...

Page 187: ...405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 11 13 Dimensions and Cut out ...

Page 188: ...accordance with the instructions in the relevant chapter see Chapter 34 Video terminal accessories Transfer PC VT For everything to function properly the first time the VT operator terminal is switched on it needs to be correctly loaded that is it needs to have trans ferred to it Firmware Communication driver Project Given that the transfer of the three files in practice occurs with a single opera...

Page 189: ...rted in the VT terminal see Page 11 18 The function to press depends on which port you intend to use MSP or ASP The VT is now ready to receive refer to Software Manual for transfer procedure VT terminal with Modem function Proceed from the preceding mask the following mask appears Enter shift Enter VT310 TRANSFER PAGE Graphic controller BOOT check OK Graphic controller RAM check OK Graphic control...

Page 190: ...unc tion The VT is now ready to receive see Software Manual for the transfer Information relating to driver After the project has been transferred the VT can make available informa tion relating to what has been loaded The information regards Serial ports present The name of the driver loaded The version of the driver loaded Network address of the VT Last error to have occurred To acquire this inf...

Page 191: ...nd the contrast In order to access the contrast setting use or to select the SET CONTRAST option that is displayed in reverse colors and press the following mask will appear Port xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Driver xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Ver xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Addr VT xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Error xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Right next page Enter settings page Enter SET CONTRAST SET CLOCK ddd dd mm yy hh mm ss...

Page 192: ...clock to be used properly a special battery has to be inserted in the terminal see Chapter 34 Video terminal accesso ries Use and or to select the field and and or to effect any variation use to confirm To use the Memory Card either switch on the VT with held down or if the VT is already on press together in both cases it will be CONTRAST Up Down change Enter memo PgUp PgDn Enter PgUp PgDn Enter h...

Page 193: ...oblem Errors have been detected in the data exchange between the VT and the Device Solution Check the cable there may be disturbance COM BROKEN Problem Communication between VT and Device interrupted Solution Check the serial connection cable VT310 TRANSFER PAGE Graphic controller BOOT check OK Graphic controller RAM check OK Graphic controller synchronization OK Main FIRMWARE check NOT PRESENT Gr...

Page 194: ... is pressed you quit the display of information regarding the driver Adjusting the contrast on the display To improve the quality of the representation on the display it may be neces sary to adjust its contrast This can be done by going to the page proposed see Page 11 17 and changing the value from 31 to 32 in evidence at that moment Increase the value to darken the display to lighten it decrease...

Page 195: ...Functions 12 4 Front view 12 8 Customizing label 12 10 Rear view 12 11 Dimensions and Cut out 12 12 Accessories 12 13 Transfer PC VT 12 13 Preparation for reception 12 14 Information relating to driver 12 16 Improving display color quality 12 19 Adjusting the contrast on the display 12 20 This chapter consists of 20 pages ...

Page 196: ...VT320W A0000 VT320W AP000 Display Type LCD monochromatic STN LCD 16 Colors STN LCD 16 Colors TFT Representational format Graphic Resolution pixels 320 x 240 5 7 Rows by characters 16 x 40 8 x 20 4 x 10 Display area size mm 115 6 x 87 Character matrix in text mode pixels 8 x15 16 x 30 32 x 60 Character size mm x 1 x 2 x 4 2 8 x 5 2 5 6 x 10 4 11 2 x 20 8 Contrast adjustment Software Automatic compe...

Page 197: ...ries See table Chapter 34 Clock Clock Hardware With back up battery Networks Integrated Profibus DP CAN Open Optoisolated interface Ethernet 10 100Mbit RJ45 Universal Bus Connector Optional See table Chapter 34 Proprietary networks ESA Net Network server Network client Technical data Power supply 24Vdc 18 32Vdc Power absorbed at 24Vdc 15W Protection fuse Ø5x20mm 800mA Quick Blow F Protection level...

Page 198: ...m data memory Command Modify password Command Next page Command Page help Command Password login Command Password logout Command Previous page Command Print alarm history Command Printer form feed Command Quit project Command Report Command Restarts reading time sampled trend Command Run pipeline Command Save alarms history and trend buffers in flash Command Save recipe in data memory Command Save...

Page 199: ...ction Go to page Function Internal command Function Invert bit value Function Macro Function None Function Reset bit permanently Function Reset real time bit Function Sequences Function Sets bit permanently Function Sets real time bit Function Value structure direct command Global configuration of E keys Global configuration of F keys Headers and footers Total Number of fields per H F 128 128 Info...

Page 200: ...ork Number Total bytes 256 1024 Recipe field for recipe structure Recipes Number of variables per recipe 2048 512 Rectangles Redefinable characters Reports 128 Sequences Random 128 Sequences Start stop Static bitmaps Symbolic field Bit group structured dynamic bitmaps 1024 Symbolic field Single bit structured dynamic bitmaps Symbolic field Value structured dynamic bitmaps System messages System va...

Page 201: ...riables Limit values and linear scaling variables 112xpages Variables Movement variable Mobile symbolic field Variables Threshold variables Variables Floating Point numerical variables Variables Numerical variables DEC HEX BIN BCD Variables String variables ASCII Table 12 1 Functions and objects realizable with this VT Part 4 of 4 Code of terminal VT320W Objects Functions Quantity Unless otherwise...

Page 202: ...ation error is detected 6 Power LED Lights up when power in ON 7 Battery LED Lights up when the battery has nearly run out Enter Help Info Ack Ack All Battery Power X 0 PgUp PgDn Esc Clr F22 F21 F20 F19 F23 F27 F26 F25 F24 F28 Alarm Hist shift 1 D E F 4 M N O 7 V W X 2 G H I 5 P Q R 8 Y Z 3 J K L 6 S T U 9 0 A B C space F10 F1 F11 F12 F2 F3 F13 F14 F4 F5 F15 F16 F6 F7 F17 F8 F18 F9 VT320W 1 2 3 6 ...

Page 203: ...s When in setting phase moves cursor to the right of the field Quits setting of data info messages sequence directory com munication driver Displays info messages Displays ISA alarms Displays according to context information message help alarm help or page help Acknowledgment of ISA alarms on display Print the entire display area No predefined function In setting phase restores the initial value o...

Page 204: ...ot exceed 125µm microme ters Do not use either stiff materials or glues Before starting to insert the customized label see Chapter 29 Inserting customized labels Position Function Dimensions L x H mm 1 F key customization F 16 x 111 2 ESA Logo VT Model 115 x 10 3 F key customization F 191 x 15 4 F key customization F 16 x 111 1 3 2 4 ...

Page 205: ...A Auxiliary port for connecting optional accessories B Trimmer for brightness control C Power supply connector D MSP serial port for communicating with PLC PC E ASP serial port for communicating with PC or other devices F LPT port for connecting printer Optional E C F D A B ...

Page 206: ...CHAPTER 12 Video terminal VT320W 405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 12 12 Dimensions and Cut out ...

Page 207: ...he instructions in the relevant chapter see Chapter 34 Video terminal accessories Transfer PC VT For everything to function properly the first time the VT operator terminal is switched on it needs to be correctly loaded that is it needs to have trans ferred to it Firmware Communication driver Project Given that the transfer of the three files in practice occurs with a single operation it will be d...

Page 208: ...r case wait a moment VT terminal with no Modem function The following mask appears F3 MemoCARD is only enabled when a Memory Card has been inserted in the VT terminal see Page 12 18 The function to press depends on which port you intend to use MSP or ASP The VT is now ready to receive refer to Software Manual for transfer procedure VT terminal with Modem function Proceed from the preceding mask th...

Page 209: ...intend to use for the trans fer Slow 9600bit sec or Fast 38400bit sec press the corresponding func tion The VT is now ready to receive see Software Manual for the transfer VT320 TRANSFER PAGE Graphic controller BOOT check OK Graphic controller RAM check OK Graphic controller synchronization OK Main FIRMWARE check NOT PRESENT Graphic controller FIRMWARE ERROR F1 MODEM F2 PC ENTER Prj VT320 TRANSFER...

Page 210: ... Last error to have occurred To acquire this information carry out the following operations Be situated in any page of the project Press twice you will see There is one of these pages for each communication port you can move between the various pages by pressing If you press while displaying this page you can access the page for set ting the clock and the contrast Shift Port xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx ...

Page 211: ...ng mask will appear Use and or to effect any variation and for the confirmation To be able to set the clock use or to select the SET CLOCK option that is displayed in reverse colors and press the following mask will appear SET CLOCK ddd dd mm yy hh mm ss Up Down select Enter set SET CONTRAST PgUp PgDn Enter CONTRAST Up Down change Enter memo PgUp PgDn Enter PgUp PgDn Enter ...

Page 212: ... with held down or if the VT is already on press together in both cases it will be nec essary to wait a moment before the following mask appears on the VT Press F3 MemoCARD if the key is not on screen see Page 12 14 and hh mm ss dd mm yy Lf Rt select Up Down change Enter memo PgUp PgDn Enter Enter shift Enter VT320 TRANSFER PAGE Graphic controller BOOT check OK Graphic controller RAM check OK Grap...

Page 213: ...ween VT and Device interrupted Solution Check the serial connection cable An error message followed by indicates that the error is not currently present but was and has since disappeared Example COM BROKEN When is pressed you quit the display of information regarding the driver Improving display color quality To improve the color quality adjust the contrast of the display if the colors are too dar...

Page 214: ...t its contrast This can be done by going to the page proposed see Page 12 17 and changing the value from 63 to 64 in evidence at that moment Increase the value to darken the display to lighten it decrease the value We advise this to be done at typical room temperature and with the terminal at operating temperature about 30 minutes after switching on and with the screen saver disabled see Software ...

Page 215: ...ons 13 4 Front view 13 8 Customizing label 13 10 Rear view 13 11 Dimensions and Cut out 13 12 Accessories 13 13 Transfer PC VT 13 13 Preparation for reception 13 14 Information relating to driver 13 16 Improving display color quality 13 20 Adjusting the contrast on the display 13 20 This chapter consists of a total of 20 pages ...

Page 216: ...0 VT330W APS00 VT330W APT00 Display Type LCD Monochromatic STN LCD 256 Colors STN LCD 256 Colors TFT Representational format Graphic Resolution pixels 640 x 480 10 4 Rows by characters 30 x 80 15 x 40 7 x 20 Display area size mm 196 x 148 211 2 x 158 211 2 x 158 4 Character matrix in text mode pixels 8 x16 16 x 32 32 x 64 Character size mm x 1 x 2 x 4 2 7 x 5 4 5 4 x 10 7 10 7 x 21 4 Contrast adju...

Page 217: ...cessories See table Chapter 34 Clock Clock Hardware With back up battery Networks Integrated Profibus DP CAN Open Optoisolated interface Ethernet 10 100Mbit RJ45 Universal Bus Connector Optional See table Chapter 34 Proprietary networks ESA Net Network server Network client Technical data Power supply 24Vdc 18 32Vdc Power absorbed at 24Vdc 15W Protection fuse Ø5x20mm 1 25A Quick Blow F Protection ...

Page 218: ... from data memory Command Modify password Command Next page Command Page help Command Password login Command Password logout Command Previous page Command Print alarm history Command Printer form feed Command Quit project Command Report Command Restarts reading time sampled trend Command Run pipeline Command Save alarms history and trend buffers in flash Command Save recipe in data memory Command ...

Page 219: ...ction Go to page Function Internal command Function Invert bit value Function Macro Function None Function Reset bit permanently Function Reset real time bit Function Sequences Function Sets bit permanently Function Sets real time bit Function Value structure direct command Global configuration of E keys Global configuration of F keys Headers and footers Total Number of fields per H F 128 128 Info...

Page 220: ...SANET network Number Total bytes 256 1024 Recipe field for recipe structure Recipes Number of variables per recipe 1024 512 Rectangles Redefinable characters Reports 128 Sequences Random 128 Sequences Start stop Static bitmaps Symbolic field Bit group structured dynamic bitmaps 1024 Symbolic field Single bit structured dynamic bitmaps Symbolic field Value structured dynamic bitmaps System messages...

Page 221: ...iables Limit values and linear scaling variables 304 x pages Variables Movement variable Mobile symbolic field Variables Threshold variables Variables Floating Point numerical variables Variables Numerical variables DEC HEX BIN BCD Variables String variables ASCII Table 13 1 Functions and objects realizable with this VT Part 4 of 4 Code of terminal VT330W Objects Functions Quantity Unless otherwis...

Page 222: ... when power in ON 8 Battery LED Lights up when the battery has nearly run out Starts input Confirms setting of data Page up When in setting phase edits dynamic text Enter VT330W Help Info Ack Ack All Battery Power X0 Space F12 F13 B A D C F E H G J I L K N M P O R Q T S V U X W Z Y 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 _ Clr Ctrl Alt Tab Esc F11 F10 F9 F8 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 Shift PgUp PgDn Spare F14 F15 F16 F17 F...

Page 223: ...ory com munication driver Displays info messages Displays ISA alarms Displays according to context information message help alarm help or page help Acknowledgment of ISA alarms on display Print the entire display area No predefined function No predefined function No predefined function No predefined function In setting phase restores the initial value of the field Acknowledges all ISA alarms Displ...

Page 224: ...total thickness of the label must not exceed 125µm microme ters Do not use either stiff materials or glues Before starting to insert the customized label see Chapter 29 Inserting customized labels Position Function Dimensions L x H mm 1 ESA Logo VT Model 162 x 13 2 F key customization F 17 x 207 2 1 ...

Page 225: ...iew Position Function A Auxiliary port for connecting optional accessories B LPT port for connecting printer C ASP serial port for communicating with PC or other devices D MSP serial port for communicating with PLC PC E Power supply connector A B C D E ...

Page 226: ...CHAPTER 13 Video terminal VT330W 405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 13 12 Dimensions and Cut out ...

Page 227: ...he instructions in the relevant chapter see Chapter 34 Video terminal accessories Transfer PC VT For everything to function properly the first time the VT operator terminal is switched on it needs to be correctly loaded that is it needs to have trans ferred to it Firmware Communication driver Project Given that the transfer of the three files in practice occurs with a single operation it will be d...

Page 228: ...moment VT terminal with no Modem function The following mask appears F3 MemoCARD is only enabled when a Memory Card has been inserted in the VT terminal see Page 13 18 The function to press depends on which port you intend to use MSP or ASP The VT is now ready to receive refer to Software Manual for transfer procedure VT terminal with Modem function Proceed from the preceding mask the following ma...

Page 229: ...EM the following mask will appear VT330W TRANSFER PAGE Graphic controller BOOT check OK Graphic controller RAM check OK Main BOOT and RAM check OK Graphic controller synchronization OK Main FIRMWARE check NOT PRESENT Graphic controller FIRMWARE ERROR F1 MODEM F2 PC ENTER Prj VT330W TRANSFER PAGE Graphic controller BOOT check OK Graphic controller RAM check OK Main BOOT and RAM check OK Graphic con...

Page 230: ... Serial ports present The name of the driver loaded The version of the driver loaded Network address of the VT Last error to have occurred To acquire this information carry out the following operations Be situated in any page of the project Press twice you will see There is one of these pages for each communication port you can move between the various pages by pressing If you press while displayi...

Page 231: ...ss the contrast setting use or to select the SET CONTRAST option that is displayed in reverse colors and press the following mask will appear SET CONTRAST SET CLOCK ddd dd mm yy hh mm ss Up Down select Enter set PgUp PgDn Enter CONTRAST Up Down change Enter memo ...

Page 232: ...erly a special battery has to be inserted in the terminal see Chapter 34 Video terminal accesso ries Use and or to select the field and and or to effect any variation use to confirm To use the Memory Card either switch on the VT with held down or if the VT is already on press together in both cases it will be nec essary to wait a moment before the following mask appears on the VT PgUp PgDn Enter P...

Page 233: ...30W TRANSFER PAGE Graphic controller BOOT check OK Graphic controller RAM check OK Main BOOT and RAM check OK Graphic controller synchronization OK Main FIRMWARE check NOT PRESENT Graphic controller FIRMWARE ERROR F1 MSP F2 ASP F3 MemoCARD ENTER Prj MEMORY CARD MENU F1 Backup ALL F5 Restore ALL F2 Backup FW PRJ F6 Restore FW PRJ F3 Backup RECIPES F7 Restore RECIPE F4 Backup ALARMS F8 Restore ALARM...

Page 234: ... color quality adjust the contrast of the display if the colors are too dark increase the contrast if on the other hand the colors are too light decrease the contrast Adjusting the contrast on the display To improve the quality of the representation on the display it may be neces sary to adjust its contrast This can be done by going to the page proposed see Page 13 17 and changing the value from 6...

Page 235: ...view 14 10 CAN series rear view 14 11 Ethernet series rear view 14 12 Dimensions and Cut out 14 13 Accessories 14 14 Methods of mounting 14 14 Calibration of Touch Screen 14 15 Termination of CAN line 14 17 Introducing the MAC address 14 18 Transfer PC VT 14 20 Preparation for reception 14 20 Information relating to driver 14 22 Adjusting the contrast on the display 14 25 This chapter consists of ...

Page 236: ...lors STN LCD 16 Colors TFT Touch screen Matrix 20 x 8 Cell 12x16 pixels Representational format Graphic Resolution pixels 240 x 128 4 Rows x characters 16 x 40 8 x 20 4 x 10 21 x 30 10 x 15 5 x 7 Display area size mm 94 5 x 54 5 Character matrix in text mode pixels 6 x 8 12 x 16 24 x 32 Character size mm x 1 x 2 x 4 2 3 x 5 2 4 6 x 5 8 9 1 x 11 7 Contrast adjustment Software Automatic compensation...

Page 237: ...lock Hardware with Supercapacitor Min 72h Networks Integrated Profibus DP CAN Open Optoisolated interface Ethernet 10 100Mbit RJ45 Universal Bus Connector Optional See table Chapter 34 Proprietary networks ESA Net Network server Network client Technical data Power supply 24Vdc 18 32Vdc Power absorbed at 24Vdc 10W Protection fuse Ø5x20mm 800mA Quick Blow F Protection level IP65 front end Operating ...

Page 238: ...ecipe from data memory Command Modify password Command Next page Command Page help Command Password login Command Password logout Command Previous page Command Print alarm history Command Printer form feed Command Quit project Command Report Command Restarts reading time sampled trend Command Run pipeline Command Save alarms history and trend buffers in flash Command Save recipe in data memory Com...

Page 239: ...nction Go to page Function Internal command Function Invert bit value Function Macro Function None Function Reset bit permanently Function Reset real time bit Function Sequences Function Sets bit permanently Function Sets real time bit Function Value structure direct command Global configuration of E keys Global configuration of F keys Headers and footers Total Number of fields per H F 32 128 Info...

Page 240: ...work Number Total bytes Recipe field for recipe structure Recipes Number of variables per recipe 128 256 Rectangles Redefinable characters Reports 32 Sequences Random Sequences Start stop Static bitmaps Symbolic field Bit group structured dynamic bitmaps 1024 Symbolic field Single bit structured dynamic bitmaps Symbolic field Value structured dynamic bitmaps System messages System variables assign...

Page 241: ...mit values and linear scaling variables 32 x pages Variables Movement variable Mobile symbolic field Variables Threshold variables Variables Floating Point numerical variables Variables Numerical variables DEC HEX BIN BCD Variables String variables ASCII Table 14 1 Functions and objects realizable with this VT Part 4 of 4 Code of terminal VT155W Objects Functions Quantity Unless otherwise stated t...

Page 242: ...CHAPTER 14 Video terminal VT155W 405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 14 8 Front view All buttons and signals are defined using the programming software see Software Manual ...

Page 243: ... 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 14 9 Standard series rear view Position Function A Power supply connector B ASP serial port for communicating with PC or other devices C MSP serial port for communicating with PLC PC A C B ...

Page 244: ...T155W 405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 14 10 Profibus DP series rear view Position Function A Power supply connector B ASP serial port for communicating with PC or other devices C Serial port for network communication A B C ...

Page 245: ...405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 14 11 CAN series rear view Position Function A Power supply connector B ASP serial port for communicating with PC or other devices C CAN serial port A B C ...

Page 246: ...1 of 25 02 2008 14 12 Ethernet series rear view Position Function A Power supply connector B ASP serial port for communicating with PC or other devices C Ethernet network 10 100Mbit RJ45 For the diagnostic mode of the LEDs see Chapter 31 Ethernet port A C B ...

Page 247: ...405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 14 13 Dimensions and Cut out ...

Page 248: ... instructions in the relevant chapter see Chapter 34 Video terminal accessories Methods of mounting There are two ways of mounting the VT155 on the container horizontally or vertically Once you have chosen the direction that means you can see the project properly and you are in the project creation phase choose the terminal with the same orientation see Software Manual Chapter 5 New Once the orien...

Page 249: ...pplied that is the resistive area of the glass has to be adjusted to the visible are of the display Should it be thought necessary to repeat the calibration procedure this can be done by following the instructions set out below The procedure must be carried out with great care as the preci sion of the keys area depends on the calibration How to perform the calibration procedure Make sure the VT is...

Page 250: ...1 on pins 2 3 C Reconnect the power supply and switch on the terminal the following mask appears Touch the corner indicated in the figure then the following page appears on screen J1 C J1 3 2 1 Touch screen calibration Press bottom left point Touch screen calibration Press top right point ...

Page 251: ...ain The calibration procedure has finished if the calibration has be carried out wrongly or imprecisely repeat the procedure Termination of CAN line This paragraph applies only to the CAN series The VT in question inte grates the termination resistances of the serial line typically 120 ohms which can be inserted by means of a jumper preset on 1 2 line not termi nated To activate the termination Ma...

Page 252: ...terminal in the transfer page The MAC address is permanently memorized in the terminal but should it be necessary to execute an aided BOOT update see Software Manual Chapter 14 BOOT update the address is lost This operation must be carried out only with the advice of the ESA Customer Care Department Terminals with no valid MAC address when switched present a mask for its insertion If no MAC addres...

Page 253: ...h terminal Reconnect the power supply to the terminal and if necessary calibrate the touch screen see Page 14 15 Replace the back cover Switch on the terminal again The following mask appears introduce the address previously noted down e g 00 0E 0E 00 00 01 Use the arrow to make the setting Once the address has been con firmed the following page is displayed 00 0E 0E xx xx xx 00 0E 0E xx xx xx ESC...

Page 254: ...th a single operation it will be defined as Project transfer for the sake of simplicity For this it is essential that the VT be prepared to receive the transfer See also Chapter 38 Command area Preparation for reception The program VTWIN see Software Manual must be used for the transfer but the terminal must be set up to receive This means carrying out the fol lowing steps Check that the VT is off...

Page 255: ...pear Choose the required transfer mode MODEM if you intend to use a modem or PC if you intend to use a serial port touch the relevant on the display If the choose made is PC the VT is ready to receive see Software Manual for transfer if on the other hand you choose MODEM the following VT155W TRANSFER PAGE Main BOOT and RAM check OK Main FIRMWARE check OK SELECT MSP ASP EXIT VT155W TRANSFER PAGE Ma...

Page 256: ...ransferred the VT can make available informa tion relating to what has been loaded The information regards Serial ports present The name of the driver loaded The version of the driver loaded Network address of the VT Last error to have occurred To acquire this information carry out the following operations Be situated in any page of the project Press two diagonally opposed angles that are free of ...

Page 257: ...etting the clock and the contrast To set the clock and the contrast while displaying the above illus trated page press the following mask appears To set the contrast touch the words SET CONTRAST on the display you will see the following mask PROG ESC TRAN PAGE Port xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Ver xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Addr VT xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Error xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Driver xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx...

Page 258: ... touch the words SET CLOCK on the display the following mask appears Use the arrow for any variation see Chapter 37 Operation of terminal with touch screen Prepare the VT to receive the program To prepare the VT to receive the program while displaying the driver information page see Page 14 22 press and you will see the following mask ESC CONTRAST ESC hh mm ss dd mm yy TRAN PAGE ...

Page 259: ... and has since disappeared Example COM BROKEN When is pressed you quit the display of information regarding the driver Adjusting the contrast on the display To improve the quality of the representation on the display it may be neces sary to adjust its contrast This can be done by going to the page proposed see Page 14 23 and changing the value from 31 to 32 in evidence at that moment Increase the ...

Page 260: ......

Page 261: ...nt view 15 8 Standard series rear view 15 9 Ethernet series rear view 15 10 Dimensions and Cut out 15 11 Accessories 15 12 Methods of mounting 15 12 Calibration of Touch Screen 15 13 Introducing the MAC address 15 15 Transfer PC VT 15 17 Preparation for reception 15 18 Information relating to driver 15 19 This chapter consists of 22 pages ...

Page 262: ...ors TFT Touch screen Matrix 20 x 16 Cell 16 x15 pixels Representational format Graphic Resolution pixels 320 x 240 3 6 Rows x characters 16 x 40 8 x 20 4 x 10 21 x 30 10 x 15 5 x 7 Display area size mm 75 5 x 57 3 Character matrix in text mode pixels 8 x 15 16 x 30 32 x 60 Character size mm x 1 x 2 x 4 1 82 x 3 42 3 65 x 6 84 7 30 x 13 68 Contrast adjustment Software Automatic compensation with te...

Page 263: ...pter 34 Clock Clock Hardware with Supercapacitor Min 72h Typically130h Networks Integrated Profibus DP CAN Open Optoisolated interface Ethernet 10 100Mbit RJ45 Universal Bus Connector Optional See table Chapter 34 Proprietary networks ESA Net Network server Network client Technical data Power supply 24Vdc 18 32Vdc Power absorbed at 24Vdc 10W Protection fuse Self resetting Protection level IP65 fro...

Page 264: ...ecipe from data memory Command Modify password Command Next page Command Page help Command Password login Command Password logout Command Previous page Command Print alarm history Command Printer form feed Command Quit project Command Report Command Restarts reading time sampled trend Command Run pipeline Command Save alarms history and trend buffers in flash Command Save recipe in data memory Com...

Page 265: ...nction Go to page Function Internal command Function Invert bit value Function Macro Function None Function Reset bit permanently Function Reset real time bit Function Sequences Function Sets bit permanently Function Sets real time bit Function Value structure direct command Global configuration of E keys Global configuration of F keys Headers and footers Total Number of fields per H F 32 128 Info...

Page 266: ... ESANET network Number Total bytes Recipe field for recipe structure Recipes Number of variables per recipe 128 256 Rectangles Redefinable characters Reports 32 Sequences Random Sequences Start stop Static bitmaps Symbolic field Bit group structured dynamic bitmaps 1024 Symbolic field Single bit structured dynamic bitmaps Symbolic field Value structured dynamic bitmaps System messages System varia...

Page 267: ...ariables Limit values and linear scaling variables 48 x pages Variables Movement variable Mobile symbolic field Variables Threshold variables Variables Floating Point numerical variables Variables Numerical variables DEC HEX BIN BCD Variables String variables ASCII Table 15 1 Functions and objects realizable with this VT Part 4 of 4 Code of terminal VT185W Objects Functions Quantity Unless otherwi...

Page 268: ...CHAPTER 15 Video terminal VT185W 405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 15 8 Front view All buttons and signals are defined using the programming software see Software Manual ...

Page 269: ... 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 15 9 Standard series rear view Position Function A Power supply connector B ASP serial port for communicating with PC or other devices C MSP serial port for communicating with PLC PC A C B ...

Page 270: ...1 of 25 02 2008 15 10 Ethernet series rear view Position Function A Power supply connector B ASP serial port for communicating with PC or other devices C Ethernet network 10 100Mbit RJ45 For the diagnostic mode of the LEDs see Chapter 31 Ethernet port A C B ...

Page 271: ...405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 15 11 Dimensions and Cut out ...

Page 272: ...instructions in the relevant chapter see Chapter 34 Video terminal accessories Methods of mounting There are two ways of mounting the VT185W on the container horizon tally or vertically Once you have chosen the direction that means you can see the project properly and you are in the project creation phase choose the terminal with the same orientation see Software Manual Chapter 5 New Once the orie...

Page 273: ...pplied that is the resistive area of the glass has to be adjusted to the visible are of the display Should it be thought necessary to repeat the calibration procedure this can be done by following the instructions set out below The procedure must be carried out with great care as the preci sion of the keys area depends on the calibration How to perform the calibration procedure Make sure the VT is...

Page 274: ...J1 on pins 2 3 C Reconnect the power supply and switch on the terminal the following mask appears Touch the corner indicated in the figure then the following page appears on screen C J1 3 2 1 Touch screen calibration Press bottom left point Touch screen calibration Press top right point ...

Page 275: ...ck cover Switch on the terminal again The calibration procedure has finished if the calibration has be carried out wrongly or imprecisely repeat the procedure Introducing the MAC address This paragraph relates only to the Ethernet series The Media Access Control MAC addressunambiguouslyidentifieseachterminalconnectedintheEther net network The terminal is acquired with the address already programme...

Page 276: ...ddress when switched present a mask for its insertion If no MAC address belonging to the terminal is available pro ceed as follows Check that the VT is not connected to the power supply Remove the back cover Locate the label carrying the MAC address Make a note of the number on the label e g 00 0E 0E 00 00 01 00 0E 0E fixed part that identifying as an ESA product xx xx xx variable part different f...

Page 277: ...displayed The procedure is now terminated Should a wrong MAC address have been inserted contact the ESA Customer Care Department A wrong address could give rise to an error of conflict between VT terminals in the Ethernet network Transfer PC VT For everything to function properly the first time the VT operator terminal is switched on it needs to be correctly loaded that is it needs to have trans f...

Page 278: ...N see Software Manual must be used for the transfer but the terminal must be set up to receive This means carrying out the fol lowing steps Check that the VT is off Check that there is a serial connection between the PC and the VT Switch on the VT and wait for the following mask to appear Press one after the other the diagonally opposite corners free of settable objects or buttons at least one cor...

Page 279: ...ld be according to the speed you intend to use for the transfer Slow 9600bit secorFast 38400bit sec touchtherelevant onthedisplay The VT is now ready to receive see Software Manual for the transfer Information relating to driver After the project has been transferred the VT can make available informa tion relating to what has been loaded The information regards Serial ports present The name of the...

Page 280: ...be free and you will see There is one of these pages for each communication port movement between the various pages is effected by pressing From this page you can Set the clock Prepare the VT to receive the program Setting the clock To set the clock while displaying the above illustrated page press the following mask appears PROG ESC TRAN PAGE Port xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Ver xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx A...

Page 281: ...erminal with touch screen Prepare the VT to receive the program To prepare the VT to receive the program while displaying the driver information page see Page 15 19 press and you will see the following mask To proceed see Page 15 18 ESC SET CLOCK ddd dd mm yy hh mm ss ESC hh mm ss dd mm yy TRAN PAGE VT185W TRANSFER PAGE Main BOOT and RAM check OK Main FIRMWARE check OK SELECT MSP ASP EXIT ...

Page 282: ...ata exchange between the VT and the Device Solution Check the cable there may be disturbance COM BROKEN Problem Communication between VT and Device interrupted Solution Check the serial connection cable An error message followed by indicates that the error is not currently present but was and has since disappeared Example COM BROKEN When is pressed you quit the display of information regarding the...

Page 283: ...ont view 16 9 Rear view 16 10 Dimensions and Cut out 16 11 Accessories 16 12 Connection cable 16 12 Adjusting holding strap for grip 16 12 Calibration of Touch Screen 16 12 Transfer PC VT 16 15 Preparation for reception 16 15 Information relating to driver 16 17 Adjusting the contrast on the display 16 22 This chapter consists of 22 pages ...

Page 284: ...16 Colors TFT Touch screen Matrix 20 x 16 Cell 16x15 pixels Representational format Graphic Resolution pixels 320 x 240 5 7 Rows x characters 16 x 40 8 x 20 4 x 10 Display area size mm 115 2 x 86 4 Character matrix in text mode pixels 8 x15 16 x 30 32 x 60 Character size mm x 1 x 2 x 4 2 8 x 5 2 5 6 x 10 4 11 2 x 20 8 Contrast adjustment Software Automatic compensation with temperature Character s...

Page 285: ...us DP CAN Open Optoisolated interface Ethernet 10 100Mbit RJ45 Universal Bus Connector Optional See table Chapter 34 Proprietary networks ESA Net Network server Network client Code of terminal Characteristics of the terminal VT505H 00000 VT505H 000CN 1 Using the VTHCB card see Chapter 34 Page 9 2 RS232 only Wrapping Type Antiflame PC ABS halogen free UL94 5VA at 2 5mm Drop test 1 m Connection cabl...

Page 286: ...IEC60204 1 EN60204 1 ISO11161 prEN11161 ISO10218 EN775 ANSI RIA R15 06 Technical data Power supply 24Vdc 18 32Vdc Power absorbed at 24Vdc 10W Protection fuse Self resetting Protection level Certificated IP65 Operating temperature 0 50 C Storage and transportation temperature 20 60 C Humidity non condensing 85 Weight with cable length 10m 3000gr Dimensions External W x H x D mm See on Page 34 8 Cut...

Page 287: ...mmand Modify password Command Next page Command Page help Command Password login Command Password logout Command Previous page Command Print alarm history Command Printer form feed Command Quit project Command Report Command Restarts reading time sampled trend Command Run pipeline Command Save alarms history and trend buffers in flash Command Save recipe in data memory Command Save recipe received...

Page 288: ...tion Disables key Function Go to page Function Internal command Function Invert bit value Function Macro Function None Function Reset bit permanently Function Reset real time bit Function Sequences Function Sets bit permanently Function Sets real time bit Function Value structure direct command Global configuration of E keys Global configuration of F keys Headers and footers Total Number of fields...

Page 289: ...bytes Recipe field for recipe structure Recipes Number of variables per recipe 128 256 Rectangles Redefinable characters Reports Sequences Random Sequences Start stop Static bitmaps Symbolic field Bit group structured dynamic bitmaps 1024 Symbolic field Single bit structured dynamic bitmaps Symbolic field Value structured dynamic bitmaps System messages System variables assigned to recipe structur...

Page 290: ...XOR Variables Limit values and linear scaling variables 34 x pages Variables Movement variable Mobile symbolic field Variables Threshold variables Variables Floating Point numerical variables Variables Numerical variables DEC HEX BIN BCD Variables String variables ASCII Table 16 1 Functions and objects realizable with this VT Part 4 of 4 Code of terminal VT505H Objects Functions Quantity Unless ot...

Page 291: ... NOT guarantee the operatr s complete personal safety Be sure to design your system so that is ensures the operator s complete personal safety Key Function 1 Command and or signal unit 2 System shut down button Conforms to the following stan dard s EN 60947 5 1 UL 508 CSA 22 2 No 14 3 Command and or signal unit 4 F keys 5 F keys 6 Adjustable gripper belt F9 F10 F8 F7 F6 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 2 6 5 4 1 3 ...

Page 292: ...o design your system so that is ensures the operator s complete personal safety Position Function A Housing for wall fixing hook B Identification label C Housing for wall fixing hook D Enabling button Conforms to the following standard s IEC 60947 5 1 EN 60947 5 1 JIS C8201 5 1 UL 508 CSA 22 2 No 14 Approval s ISO12100 EN292 IEC60204 1 EN60204 1 ISO11161 prEN11161 ISO10218 EN775 ANSI RIA R15 06 A ...

Page 293: ...405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 16 11 Dimensions and Cut out F4 F5 F2 F3 F1 F9 F10 F7 F8 F6 ...

Page 294: ...s terminals Adjusting holding strap for grip The strap can be altered to adjust the grip for different hand sizes To alter strap Open the leather cover Detach the strap ends Adjust the holding strap length Secure strap ends again Close leather cover Calibration of Touch Screen The screen of VT505H is made of resistive sensitive glass for this type of glass to work properly it requires a calibratio...

Page 295: ...nal the following mask appears To access the calibration page touch the message WAITING FOR BOOT FORCED three to six times in quick succession F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F9 F10 F8 F7 F6 VT5xx HANDHELD TRANSFER PAGE WAITING FOR BOOT FORCED F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F9 F10 F8 F7 F6 Touch screen calibration Press bottom left point ...

Page 296: ...ure then the following page appears on screen Touch the corner indicated in the figure to complete the calibration pro cedure the following page now appears F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F9 F10 F8 F7 F6 Touch screen calibration Press top right point F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F9 F10 F8 F7 F6 Touch screen calibration Press bottom right point ...

Page 297: ...switched on it needs to be correctly loaded that is it needs to have trans ferred to it Firmware Communication driver Project Given that the transfer of the three files in practice occurs with a single operation it will be defined as Project transfer for the sake of simplicity For this it is essential that the VT be prepared to receive the transfer See also Chapter 38 Command area Preparation for ...

Page 298: ...iagonally opposite corners free of settable objects or buttons at least one corner needs to be free and wait a moment or using the appropriate button see Page 16 20 till the VT displays the following mask F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F9 F10 F8 F7 F6 HANDHELD TRANSFER PAGE Main BOOT and RAM check OK Main FIRMWARE check OK WAIT FOR BOOT FORCED F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F9 F10 F8 F7 F6 VT5xx HANDHELD TRANSFER PAGE Main BOOT ...

Page 299: ...ow ready to receive see Software Manual for the trans fer Information relating to driver After the project has been transferred the VT can make available informa tion relating to what has been loaded The information regards Serial ports present The name of the driver loaded The version of the driver loaded Network address of the VT Last error to have occurred To acquire this information carry out ...

Page 300: ...etween the various pages is effected by pressing From this page you can Set the clock and the contrast Prepare the VT to receive the program F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F9 F10 F8 F7 F6 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F9 F10 F8 F7 F6 PROG ESC Port xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Ver xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Addr VT xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Error xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Driver xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx TRAN PAGE ...

Page 301: ...ve illus trated page press the following mask appears To set the contrast touch the words SET CONTRAST on the display you will see the following mask Use the arrow for any variation see Chapter 37 Operation of PROG F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F9 F10 F8 F7 F6 ESC SET CONTRAST SET CLOCK ddd dd mm yy hh mm ss F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F9 F10 F8 F7 F6 ESC CONTRAST ...

Page 302: ...ay the following mask appears Use the arrow for any variation see Chapter 37 Operation of terminal with touch screen Prepare the VT to receive the program To prepare the VT to receive the program while displaying the driver information page see Page 16 17 press and you will see the following mask F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F9 F10 F8 F7 F6 hh mm ss dd mm yy ESC TRAN PAGE ...

Page 303: ...hange between the VT and the Device Solution Check the cable there may be disturbance COM BROKEN Problem Communication between VT and Device interrupted Solution Check the serial connection cable An error message followed by indicates that the error is not currently present but was and has since disappeared Example COM BROKEN When is pressed you quit the display of information regarding the driver...

Page 304: ...t its contrast This can be done by going to the page proposed see Page 16 19 and changing the value from 31 to 32 in evidence at that moment Increase the value to darken the display to lighten it decrease the value We advise this to be done at typical room temperature and with the terminal at operating temperature about 30 minutes after switching on and with the screen saver disabled see Software ...

Page 305: ...w 17 9 CAN series rear view 17 10 Ethernet series rear view 17 11 Dimensions and Cut out 17 12 Accessories 17 13 Calibration of Touch Screen 17 13 Termination of CAN line 17 16 Introducing the MAC address 17 17 Transfer PC VT 17 20 Preparation for reception 17 20 Information relating to driver 17 22 Adjusting the contrast on the display 17 25 This chapter consists of 26 pages ...

Page 306: ...lue STN LCD 16 Colors STN LCD 16 Colors TFT Touch screen Matrix 20 x 16 Cell 16x15 pixels Representational format Graphic Resolution pixels 320 x 240 5 7 Rows x characters 16 x 40 8 x 20 4 x 10 Display area size mm 115 2 x 86 4 Character matrix in text mode pixels 8 x15 16 x 30 32 x 60 Character size mm x 1 x 2 x 4 2 8 x 5 2 5 6 x 10 4 11 2 x 20 8 Contrast adjustment Software Automatic compensatio...

Page 307: ...ock Clock Software no back up battery Networks Integrated Profibus DP CAN Open Optoisolated interface Ethernet 10 100Mbit RJ45 Universal Bus Connector Optional See table Chapter 34 Proprietary networks ESA Net Network server Network client Technical data Power supply 24Vdc 18 32Vdc Power absorbed at 24Vdc 10W Protection fuse Ø5x20mm 800mA Quick Blow F Protection level IP65 front end Operating temp...

Page 308: ...om data memory Command Modify password Command Next page Command Page help Command Password login Command Password logout Command Previous page Command Print alarm history Command Printer form feed Command Quit project Command Report Command Restarts reading time sampled trend Command Run pipeline Command Save alarms history and trend buffers in flash Command Save recipe in data memory Command Sav...

Page 309: ...y Function Go to page Function Internal command Function Invert bit value Function Macro Function None Function Reset bit permanently Function Reset real time bit Function Sequences Function Sets bit permanently Function Sets real time bit Function Value structure direct command Global configuration of E keys Global configuration of F keys Headers and footers Total Number of fields per H F Info me...

Page 310: ...ork Number Total bytes Recipe field for recipe structure Recipes Number of variables per recipe 128 256 Rectangles Redefinable characters Reports Sequences Random Sequences Start stop Static bitmaps Symbolic field Bit group structured dynamic bitmaps 1024 Symbolic field Single bit structured dynamic bitmaps Symbolic field Value structured dynamic bitmaps System messages System variables assigned t...

Page 311: ...mit values and linear scaling variables 34 x pages Variables Movement variable Mobile symbolic field Variables Threshold variables Variables Floating Point numerical variables Variables Numerical variables DEC HEX BIN BCD Variables String variables ASCII Table 17 1 Functions and objects realizable with this VT Part 4 of 4 Code of terminal VT505W Objects Functions Quantity Unless otherwise stated t...

Page 312: ...CHAPTER 17 Video terminal VT505W 405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 17 8 Front view All buttons and signals are defined using the programming software see Software Manual VT505W ...

Page 313: ...7 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 17 9 Standard series rear view Position Function A Power supply connector B MSP serial port for communicating with PLC PC C PROFIBUS DP serial port for network communication Option C B A ...

Page 314: ...ER 17 Video terminal VT505W 405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 17 10 CAN series rear view Position Function A Power supply connector B MSP serial port for communicating with PLC PC D CAN serial port B A D ...

Page 315: ...7 11 Ethernet series rear view Position Function A Power supply connector B ASP serial port for communicating with PC or other devices C Ethernet network 10 100Mbit RJ45 For the diagnostic mode of the LEDs see Chapter 31 Ethernet port A C B ...

Page 316: ...CHAPTER 17 Video terminal VT505W 405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 17 12 Dimensions and Cut out ...

Page 317: ...hapter 34 Video terminal accessories Calibration of Touch Screen The screen of VT505W is made of resistive sensitive glass for this type of glass to work properly it requires a calibration procedure the terminal is already calibrated when supplied that is the resistive area of the glass has to be adjusted to the visible are of the display Should it be thought necessary to repeat the calibration pr...

Page 318: ...bration procedure Make sure the VT is not connected to the power supply Remove the back cover Identify jumper J1 Position J1 on pins 2 3 C Reconnect the power supply and switch on the terminal the following mask appears C J1 3 2 1 Standard Can Ethernet Touch screen calibration Press bottom left point ...

Page 319: ...ated in the figure then the following page appears on screen Touch the corner indicated in the figure to complete the calibration pro cedure the following page now appears Touch screen calibration Press top right point Touch screen calibration Press bottom right point ...

Page 320: ...ation procedure has finished if the calibration has be carried out wrongly or imprecisely repeat the procedure Termination of CAN line This paragraph applies only to the CAN series The VT in question inte grates the termination resistances of the serial line typically 120 ohms which can be inserted by means of a jumper preset on 1 2 line not termi nated To activate the termination Make sure the de...

Page 321: ...heEther net network The terminal is acquired with the address already programmed and is shown on the display of the terminal in the transfer page The MAC address is permanently memorized in the terminal but should it be necessary to execute an aided BOOT update see Software Manual Chapter 14 BOOT update the address is lost This operation must be carried out only with the advice of the VT505W ETHER...

Page 322: ...pply Remove the back cover Locate the label carrying the MAC address Make a note of the number on the label e g 00 0E 0E 00 00 01 00 0E 0E fixed part that identifying as an ESA product xx xx xx variable part different for each terminal Reconnect the power supply to the terminal and if necessary calibrate the touch screen see Page 17 13 Replace the back cover Switch on the terminal again The follow...

Page 323: ...terminated Should a wrong MAC address have been inserted contact the ESA Customer Care Department A wrong address could give rise to an error of conflict between VT terminals in the Ethernet network Enter a valid MAC address 00 0E 0E 00 00 00 VT505W ETHERNET TRANSFER PAGE Main BOOT and RAM check OK Main FIRMWARE check OK SELECT MAC addr 00 0E 0E 00 00 01 MODEM PC EXIT ...

Page 324: ...ve the transfer See also Chapter 38 Command area Preparation for reception The program VTWIN see Software Manual must be used for the transfer but the terminal must be set up to receive This means carrying out the fol lowing steps Check that the VT is off Check that there is a serial connection between the PC and the VT Switch on the VT and wait for the following mask to appear Press one after the...

Page 325: ... if you intend to use a modem or PC if you intend to use a serial port touch the relevant on the display If the choose made is PC the VT is ready to receive see Software Manual for transfer if on the other hand you choose MODEM the following mask will appear VT505 TRANSFER PAGE Main BOOT and RAM check OK Main FIRMWARE check OK WAITING FOR DOWNLOAD FROM MSP VT505 TRANSFER PAGE Main BOOT and RAM che...

Page 326: ...en transferred the VT can make available informa tion relating to what has been loaded The information regards Serial ports present The name of the driver loaded The version of the driver loaded Network address of the VT Last error to have occurred To acquire this information carry out the following operations Be situated in any page of the project Press two diagonally opposed angles that are free...

Page 327: ...to receive the program Setting the clock and the contrast To set the clock and the contrast while displaying the above illus trated page press the following mask appears To set the contrast touch the words SET CONTRAST on the display PROG ESC Port xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Ver xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Addr VT xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Error xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Driver xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx TRAN PAGE PROG ES...

Page 328: ...ouch screen To set the clock touch the words SET CLOCK on the display the following mask appears Use the arrow for any variation see Chapter 37 Operation of terminal with touch screen Prepare the VT to receive the program To prepare the VT to receive the program while displaying the driver information page see Page 17 22 press and you will ESC CONTRAST hh mm ss dd mm yy ESC TRAN PAGE ...

Page 329: ...e interrupted Solution Check the serial connection cable An error message followed by indicates that the error is not currently present but was and has since disappeared Example COM BROKEN When is pressed you quit the display of information regarding the driver Adjusting the contrast on the display To improve the quality of the representation on the display it may be neces sary to adjust its contr...

Page 330: ...405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 17 26 We advise this to be done at typical room temperature and with the terminal at operating temperature about 30 minutes after switching on and with the screen saver disabled see Software Manual ...

Page 331: ...w 18 9 CAN series rear view 18 10 Ethernet series rear view 18 11 Dimensions and Cut out 18 12 Accessories 18 13 Calibration of Touch Screen 18 13 Termination of CAN line 18 16 Introducing the MAC address 18 17 Transfer PC VT 18 20 Preparation for reception 18 20 Information relating to driver 18 22 Adjusting the contrast on the display 18 25 This chapter consists of 26 pages ...

Page 332: ... STN LCD 16 Colors STN LCD 16 Colors TFT Touch screen Matrix 20 x 16 Cell 16x15 pixels Representational format Graphic Resolution pixels 320 x 240 5 7 Rows x characters 16 x 40 8 x 20 4 x 10 Display area size mm 115 2 x 86 4 Character matrix in text mode pixels 8 x15 16 x 30 32 x 60 Character size mm x 1 x 2 x 4 2 8 x 5 2 5 6 x 10 4 11 2 x 20 8 Contrast adjustment Software Automatic compensation w...

Page 333: ...ardware with Supercapacitor Min 72h Typically130h Networks Integrated Profibus DP CAN Open Optoisolated interface Ethernet 10 100Mbit RJ45 Universal Bus Connector Optional See table Chapter 34 Proprietary networks ESA Net Network server Network client Technical data Power supply 24Vdc 18 32Vdc Power absorbed at 24Vdc 10W Protection fuse Ø5x20mm 800mA Quick Blow F Protection level IP65 front end Op...

Page 334: ...ecipe from data memory Command Modify password Command Next page Command Page help Command Password login Command Password logout Command Previous page Command Print alarm history Command Printer form feed Command Quit project Command Report Command Restarts reading time sampled trend Command Run pipeline Command Save alarms history and trend buffers in flash Command Save recipe in data memory Com...

Page 335: ...y Function Go to page Function Internal command Function Invert bit value Function Macro Function None Function Reset bit permanently Function Reset real time bit Function Sequences Function Sets bit permanently Function Sets real time bit Function Value structure direct command Global configuration of E keys Global configuration of F keys Headers and footers Total Number of fields per H F Info me...

Page 336: ...ork Number Total bytes Recipe field for recipe structure Recipes Number of variables per recipe 128 256 Rectangles Redefinable characters Reports Sequences Random Sequences Start stop Static bitmaps Symbolic field Bit group structured dynamic bitmaps 1024 Symbolic field Single bit structured dynamic bitmaps Symbolic field Value structured dynamic bitmaps System messages System variables assigned t...

Page 337: ...mit values and linear scaling variables 34 x pages Variables Movement variable Mobile symbolic field Variables Threshold variables Variables Floating Point numerical variables Variables Numerical variables DEC HEX BIN BCD Variables String variables ASCII Table 18 1 Functions and objects realizable with this VT Part 4 of 4 Code of terminal VT515W Objects Functions Quantity Unless otherwise stated t...

Page 338: ...CHAPTER 18 Video terminal VT515W 405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 18 8 Front view All buttons and signals are defined using the programming software see Software Manual ...

Page 339: ...7 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 18 9 Standard series rear view Position Function A Power supply connector B MSP serial port for communicating with PLC PC C PROFIBUS DP serial port for network communication Option C B A ...

Page 340: ...ER 18 Video terminal VT515W 405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 18 10 CAN series rear view Position Function A Power supply connector B MSP serial port for communicating with PLC PC D CAN serial port B A D ...

Page 341: ...8 11 Ethernet series rear view Position Function A Power supply connector B ASP serial port for communicating with PC or other devices C Ethernet network 10 100Mbit RJ45 For the diagnostic mode of the LEDs see Chapter 31 Ethernet port A C B ...

Page 342: ...CHAPTER 18 Video terminal VT515W 405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 18 12 Dimensions and Cut out ...

Page 343: ...hapter see Chapter 34 Video terminal accessories Calibration of Touch Screen The screen of VT515W is made of resistive sensitive glass for this type of glass to work properly it requires a calibration procedure the terminal is already calibrated when supplied that is the resistive area of the glass has to be adjusted to the visible are of the display Should it be thought necessary to repeat the ca...

Page 344: ...bration procedure Make sure the VT is not connected to the power supply Remove the back cover Identify jumper J1 Position J1 on pins 2 3 C Reconnect the power supply and switch on the terminal the following mask appears C J1 3 2 1 Standard Can Ethernet Touch screen calibration Press bottom left point ...

Page 345: ...ated in the figure then the following page appears on screen Touch the corner indicated in the figure to complete the calibration pro cedure the following page now appears Touch screen calibration Press top right point Touch screen calibration Press bottom right point ...

Page 346: ...ation procedure has finished if the calibration has be carried out wrongly or imprecisely repeat the procedure Termination of CAN line This paragraph applies only to the CAN series The VT in question inte grates the termination resistances of the serial line typically 120 ohms which can be inserted by means of a jumper preset on 1 2 line not termi nated To activate the termination Make sure the de...

Page 347: ...heEther net network The terminal is acquired with the address already programmed and is shown on the display of the terminal in the transfer page The MAC address is permanently memorized in the terminal but should it be necessary to execute an aided BOOT update see Software Manual Chapter 14 BOOT update the address is lost This operation must be carried out only with the advice of the VT515W ETHER...

Page 348: ...pply Remove the back cover Locate the label carrying the MAC address Make a note of the number on the label e g 00 0E 0E 00 00 01 00 0E 0E fixed part that identifying as an ESA product xx xx xx variable part different for each terminal Reconnect the power supply to the terminal and if necessary calibrate the touch screen see Page 18 13 Replace the back cover Switch on the terminal again The follow...

Page 349: ...terminated Should a wrong MAC address have been inserted contact the ESA Customer Care Department A wrong address could give rise to an error of conflict between VT terminals in the Ethernet network Enter a valid MAC address 00 0E 0E 00 00 00 VT515W ETHERNET TRANSFER PAGE Main BOOT and RAM check OK Main FIRMWARE check OK SELECT MAC addr 00 0E 0E 00 00 01 MODEM PC EXIT ...

Page 350: ...ve the transfer See also Chapter 38 Command area Preparation for reception The program VTWIN see Software Manual must be used for the transfer but the terminal must be set up to receive This means carrying out the fol lowing steps Check that the VT is off Check that there is a serial connection between the PC and the VT Switch on the VT and wait for the following mask to appear Press one after the...

Page 351: ... if you intend to use a modem or PC if you intend to use a serial port touch the relevant on the display If the choose made is PC the VT is ready to receive see Software Manual for transfer if on the other hand you choose MODEM the following mask will appear VT515 TRANSFER PAGE Main BOOT and RAM check OK Main FIRMWARE check OK WAITING FOR DOWNLOAD FROM MSP VT515 TRANSFER PAGE Main BOOT and RAM che...

Page 352: ...en transferred the VT can make available informa tion relating to what has been loaded The information regards Serial ports present The name of the driver loaded The version of the driver loaded Network address of the VT Last error to have occurred To acquire this information carry out the following operations Be situated in any page of the project Press two diagonally opposed angles that are free...

Page 353: ...to receive the program Setting the clock and the contrast To set the clock and the contrast while displaying the above illus trated page press the following mask appears To set the contrast touch the words SET CONTRAST on the display PROG ESC Port xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Ver xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Addr VT xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Error xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Driver xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx TRAN PAGE PROG ES...

Page 354: ...ouch screen To set the clock touch the words SET CLOCK on the display the following mask appears Use the arrow for any variation see Chapter 37 Operation of terminal with touch screen Prepare the VT to receive the program To prepare the VT to receive the program while displaying the driver information page see Page 18 22 press and you will ESC CONTRAST hh mm ss dd mm yy ESC TRAN PAGE ...

Page 355: ...e interrupted Solution Check the serial connection cable An error message followed by indicates that the error is not currently present but was and has since disappeared Example COM BROKEN When is pressed you quit the display of information regarding the driver Adjusting the contrast on the display To improve the quality of the representation on the display it may be neces sary to adjust its contr...

Page 356: ...405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 18 26 We advise this to be done at typical room temperature and with the terminal at operating temperature about 30 minutes after switching on and with the screen saver disabled see Software Manual ...

Page 357: ...view 19 10 Dimensions and Cut out 19 11 Accessories 19 12 Connection cable 19 12 Adjusting holding strap for grip 19 12 Calibration of Touch Screen 19 12 Transfer PC VT 19 15 Preparation for reception 19 15 Information relating to driver 19 18 Improving display color quality 19 23 Adjusting the contrast on the display 19 23 This chapter consists of 24 pages ...

Page 358: ...16 Colors TFT Touch screen Matrix 20 x 16 Cell 16x15 pixels Representational format Graphic Resolution pixels 320 x 240 5 7 Rows x characters 16 x 40 8 x 20 4 x 10 Display area size mm 115 2 x 86 4 Character matrix in text mode pixels 8 x15 16 x 30 32 x 60 Character size mm x 1 x 2 x 4 2 9 x 5 4 5 8 x 10 8 11 6 x 21 6 Contrast adjustment Software Automatic compensation with temperature Character s...

Page 359: ...egrated Profibus DP CAN Open Optoisolated interface Ethernet 10 100Mbit RJ45 Universal Bus Connector Optional See table Chapter 34 Proprietary networks ESA Net Network server Network client Code of terminal Characteristics of the terminal VT525H 00000 VT525H 000CN 1 Using the VTHCB card see Chapter 34 Page 9 2 RS232 only Wrapping Type Antiflame PC ABS halogen free UL94 5VA at 2 5mm Drop test 1 m C...

Page 360: ...IEC60204 1 EN60204 1 ISO11161 prEN11161 ISO10218 EN775 ANSI RIA R15 06 Technical data Power supply 24Vdc 18 32Vdc Power absorbed at 24Vdc 10W Protection fuse Self resetting Protection level Certificated IP65 Operating temperature 0 50 C Storage and transportation temperature 20 60 C Humidity non condensing 85 Weight with cable length 10m 3000gr Dimensions External W x H x D mm See on Page 34 8 Cut...

Page 361: ...emory Command Modify password Command Next page Command Page help Command Password login Command Password logout Command Previous page Command Print alarm history Command Printer form feed Command Quit project Command Report Command Restarts reading time sampled trend Command Run pipeline Command Save alarms history and trend buffers in flash Command Save recipe in data memory Command Save recipe ...

Page 362: ...n Disables key Function Go to page Function Internal command Function Invert bit value Function Macro Function None Function Reset bit permanently Function Reset real time bit Function Sequences Function Sets bit permanently Function Sets real time bit Function Value structure direct command Global configuration of E keys Global configuration of F keys Headers and footers Total Number of fields pe...

Page 363: ...l bytes Recipe field for recipe structure Recipes Number of variables per recipe 128 256 Rectangles Redefinable characters Reports 32 Sequences Random Sequences Start stop Static bitmaps Symbolic field Bit group structured dynamic bitmaps 1024 Symbolic field Single bit structured dynamic bitmaps Symbolic field Value structured dynamic bitmaps System messages System variables assigned to recipe str...

Page 364: ...XOR Variables Limit values and linear scaling variables 48 x pages Variables Movement variable Mobile symbolic field Variables Threshold variables Variables Floating Point numerical variables Variables Numerical variables DEC HEX BIN BCD Variables String variables ASCII Table 19 1 Functions and objects realizable with this VT Part 4 of 4 Code of terminal VT525H Objects Functions Quantity Unless ot...

Page 365: ... NOT guarantee the operatr s complete personal safety Be sure to design your system so that is ensures the operator s complete personal safety Key Function 1 Command and or signal unit 2 System shut down button Conforms to the following stan dard s EN 60947 5 1 UL 508 CSA 22 2 No 14 3 Command and or signal unit 4 F keys 5 F keys 6 Adjustable gripper belt F9 F10 F8 F7 F6 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 2 6 5 4 1 3 ...

Page 366: ...o design your system so that is ensures the operator s complete personal safety Position Function A Housing for wall fixing hook B Identification label C Housing for wall fixing hook D Enabling button Conforms to the following standard s IEC 60947 5 1 EN 60947 5 1 JIS C8201 5 1 UL 508 CSA 22 2 No 14 Approval s ISO12100 EN292 IEC60204 1 EN60204 1 ISO11161 prEN11161 ISO10218 EN775 ANSI RIA R15 06 A ...

Page 367: ...405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 19 11 Dimensions and Cut out F4 F5 F2 F3 F1 F9 F10 F7 F8 F6 ...

Page 368: ...s terminals Adjusting holding strap for grip The strap can be altered to adjust the grip for different hand sizes To alter strap Open the leather cover Detach the strap ends Adjust the holding strap length Secure strap ends again Close leather cover Calibration of Touch Screen The screen of VT525H is made of resistive sensitive glass for this type of glass to work properly it requires a calibratio...

Page 369: ...nal the following mask appears To access the calibration page touch the message WAITING FOR BOOT FORCED three to six times in quick succession F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F9 F10 F8 F7 F6 VT5xx HANDHELD TRANSFER PAGE WAITING FOR BOOT FORCED F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F9 F10 F8 F7 F6 Touch screen calibration Press bottom left point ...

Page 370: ...ure then the following page appears on screen Touch the corner indicated in the figure to complete the calibration pro cedure the following page now appears F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F9 F10 F8 F7 F6 Touch screen calibration Press top right point F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F9 F10 F8 F7 F6 Touch screen calibration Press bottom right point ...

Page 371: ...switched on it needs to be correctly loaded that is it needs to have trans ferred to it Firmware Communication driver Project Given that the transfer of the three files in practice occurs with a single operation it will be defined as Project transfer for the sake of simplicity For this it is essential that the VT be prepared to receive the transfer See also Chapter 38 Command area Preparation for ...

Page 372: ...iagonally opposite corners free of settable objects or buttons at least one corner needs to be free and wait a moment or using the appropriate button see Page 19 21 till the VT displays the following mask F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F9 F10 F8 F7 F6 HANDHELD TRANSFER PAGE Main BOOT and RAM check OK Main FIRMWARE check OK WAIT FOR BOOT FORCED F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F9 F10 F8 F7 F6 VT5xx HANDHELD TRANSFER PAGE Main BOOT ...

Page 373: ...se the required transfer mode MODEM if you intend to use a modem or PC if you intend to use a serial port touch the relevant on the display If the choose made is PC the VT is ready to receive see Software Manual for transfer if on the other hand you choose MODEM the following mask will appear F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F9 F10 F8 F7 F6 VT5xx HANDHELD TRANSFER PAGE Main BOOT and RAM check OK Main FIRMWARE check...

Page 374: ...T can make available informa tion relating to what has been loaded The information regards Serial ports present The name of the driver loaded The version of the driver loaded Network address of the VT Last error to have occurred To acquire this information carry out the following operations Be situated in any page of the project Press two diagonally opposed angles that are free of any settable obj...

Page 375: ...us pages is effected by pressing From this page you can Set the clock and the contrast Prepare the VT to receive the program F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F9 F10 F8 F7 F6 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F9 F10 F8 F7 F6 PROG ESC Port xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Ver xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Addr VT xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Error xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Driver xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx TRAN PAGE ...

Page 376: ...isplaying the above illus trated page press the following mask appears To set the contrast touch the words SET CONTRAST on the display you will see the following mask Use the arrow for any variation see Chapter 37 Operation of PROG F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F9 F10 F8 F7 F6 ESC SET CONTRAST SET CLOCK ddd dd mm yy hh mm ss F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F9 F10 F8 F7 F6 ESC CONTRAST ...

Page 377: ... mask appears Use the arrow for any variation see Chapter 37 Operation of terminal with touch screen Prepare the VT to receive the program To prepare the VT to receive the program while displaying the driver information page see Page 19 18 press and you will see the following mask F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F9 F10 F8 F7 F6 hh mm ss dd mm yy ESC TRAN PAGE ...

Page 378: ...y be encountered in the driver information page are PR ERR Problem Errors have been detected in the data exchange between the VT and the Device Solution Check the cable there may be disturbance COM BROKEN Problem Communication between VT and Device interrupted Solution Check the serial connection cable An error message followed by indicates that the error is not currently present but was and has s...

Page 379: ... To improve the quality of the representation on the display it may be neces sary to adjust its contrast This can be done by going to the page proposed see Page 19 20 and changing the value from 31 to 32 in evidence at that moment Increase the value to darken the display to lighten it decrease the value We advise this to be done at typical room temperature and with the terminal at operating temper...

Page 380: ......

Page 381: ...0 10 CAN series rear view 20 11 Ethernet series rear view 20 12 Dimensions and Cut out 20 13 Accessories 20 14 Calibration of Touch Screen 20 14 Termination of CAN line 20 17 Introducing the MAC address 20 18 Transfer PC VT 20 21 Preparation for reception 20 21 Information relating to driver 20 23 Improving display color quality 20 27 Adjusting the contrast on the display 20 27 This chapter consis...

Page 382: ... STN LCD 16 Colors STN LCD 16 Colors TFT Touch screen Matrix 20 x 16 Cell 16x15 pixels Representational format Graphic Resolution pixels 320 x 240 5 7 Rows x characters 16 x 40 8 x 20 4 x 10 Display area size mm 115 2 x 86 4 Character matrix in text mode pixels 8 x15 16 x 30 32 x 60 Character size mm x 1 x 2 x 4 2 9 x 5 4 5 8 x 10 8 11 6 x 21 6 Contrast adjustment Software Automatic compensation w...

Page 383: ...Clock Hardware with Supercapacitor Min 72h Networks Integrated Profibus DP CAN Open Optoisolated interface Ethernet 10 100Mbit RJ45 Universal Bus Connector Optional See table Chapter 34 Proprietary networks ESA Net Network server Network client Technical data Power supply 24Vdc 18 32Vdc Power absorbed at 24Vdc 10W Protection fuse Ø5x20mm 800mA Quick Blow F Protection level IP65 front end Operating...

Page 384: ...ecipe from data memory Command Modify password Command Next page Command Page help Command Password login Command Password logout Command Previous page Command Print alarm history Command Printer form feed Command Quit project Command Report Command Restarts reading time sampled trend Command Run pipeline Command Save alarms history and trend buffers in flash Command Save recipe in data memory Com...

Page 385: ...nction Go to page Function Internal command Function Invert bit value Function Macro Function None Function Reset bit permanently Function Reset real time bit Function Sequences Function Sets bit permanently Function Sets real time bit Function Value structure direct command Global configuration of E keys Global configuration of F keys Headers and footers Total Number of fields per H F 32 128 Info...

Page 386: ...twork Number Total bytes Recipe field for recipe structure Recipes Number of variables per recipe 128 256 Rectangles Redefinable characters Reports 32 Sequences Random Sequences Start stop Static bitmaps Symbolic field Bit group structured dynamic bitmaps 1024 Symbolic field Single bit structured dynamic bitmaps Symbolic field Value structured dynamic bitmaps System messages System variables assig...

Page 387: ...mit values and linear scaling variables 48 x pages Variables Movement variable Mobile symbolic field Variables Threshold variables Variables Floating Point numerical variables Variables Numerical variables DEC HEX BIN BCD Variables String variables ASCII Table 20 1 Functions and objects realizable with this VT Part 4 of 4 Code of terminal VT525W Objects Functions Quantity Unless otherwise stated t...

Page 388: ...CHAPTER 20 Video terminal VT525W 405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 20 8 Front view All buttons and signals are defined using the programming software see Software Manual ...

Page 389: ... 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 20 9 Standard series rear view Position Function A Power supply connector B ASP serial port for communicating with PC or other devices C MSP serial port for communicating with PLC PC A B C ...

Page 390: ...T525W 405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 20 10 Profibus DP series rear view Position Function A Power supply connector B ASP serial port for communicating with PC or other devices C Serial port for network communication B A C ...

Page 391: ...405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 20 11 CAN series rear view Position Function A Power supply connector B ASP serial port for communicating with PC or other devices D CAN serial port B A D ...

Page 392: ...1 of 25 02 2008 20 12 Ethernet series rear view Position Function A Power supply connector B ASP serial port for communicating with PC or other devices C Ethernet network 10 100Mbit RJ45 For the diagnostic mode of the LEDs see Chapter 31 Ethernet port A C B ...

Page 393: ...405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 20 13 Dimensions and Cut out ...

Page 394: ...in the relevant chapter see Chapter 34 Video terminal accessories Calibration of Touch Screen The screen of VT525W is made of resistive sensitive glass for this type of glass to work properly it requires a calibration procedure the terminal is already calibrated when supplied that is the resistive area of the glass has to be adjusted to the visible are of the display Should it be thought necessary...

Page 395: ...on procedure Make sure the VT is not connected to the power supply Remove the back cover Identify jumper J1 Position J1 on pins 2 3 C Reconnect the power supply and switch on the terminal the following mask appears C J1 3 2 1 Touch screen calibration Press bottom left point ...

Page 396: ...the corner indicated in the figure then the following page appears on screen Touch the corner indicated in the figure to complete the calibration pro cedure the following page now appears Touch screen calibration Press top right point Touch screen calibration Press bottom right point ...

Page 397: ...has finished if the calibration has be carried out wrongly or imprecisely repeat the procedure Termination of CAN line This paragraph applies only to the CAN series The VT in question inte grates the termination resistances of the serial line typically 120 ohms which can be inserted by means of a jumper preset on 1 2 line not termi nated To activate the termination Make sure the device is not conn...

Page 398: ...ther net network The terminal is acquired with the address already programmed and is shown on the display of the terminal in the transfer page The MAC address is permanently memorized in the terminal but should it be necessary to execute an aided BOOT update see Software Manual Chapter 14 BOOT update the address is lost This operation must be carried out only with the advice of the ESA Customer Ca...

Page 399: ...te the label carrying the MAC address Make a note of the number on the label e g 00 0E 0E 00 00 01 00 0E 0E fixed part that identifying as an ESA product xx xx xx variable part different for each terminal Reconnect the power supply to the terminal and if necessary calibrate the touch screen see Page 20 14 Replace the back cover Switch on the terminal again The following mask appears introduce the ...

Page 400: ...procedure is now terminated Should a wrong MAC address have been inserted contact the ESA Customer Care Department A wrong address could give rise to an error of conflict between VT terminals in the Ethernet network Enter a valid MAC address 00 0E 0E 00 00 00 VT525W ETHERNET TRANSFER PAGE Main BOOT and RAM check OK Main FIRMWARE check OK SELECT MAC addr 00 0E 0E 00 00 01 MSP ASP EXIT ...

Page 401: ...t the VT be prepared to receive the transfer See also Chapter 38 Command area Preparation for reception The program VTWIN see Software Manual must be used for the transfer but the terminal must be set up to receive This means carrying out the fol lowing steps Check that the VT is off Check that there is a serial connection between the PC and the VT Switch on the VT and wait for the following mask ...

Page 402: ...d to use a modem or PC if you intend to use a serial port touch the relevant on the display If the choose made is PC the VT is ready to receive see Software Manual for transfer if on the other hand you choose MODEM the following mask will appear VT525W TRANSFER PAGE Main BOOT and RAM check OK Main FIRMWARE check OK SELECT VT525W TRANSFER PAGE Main BOOT and RAM check OK Main FIRMWARE check OK SELEC...

Page 403: ...e VT can make available informa tion relating to what has been loaded The information regards Serial ports present The name of the driver loaded The version of the driver loaded Network address of the VT Last error to have occurred To acquire this information carry out the following operations Be situated in any page of the project Press two diagonally opposed angles that are free of any settable ...

Page 404: ...an Set the clock and the contrast Prepare the VT to receive the program Setting the clock and the contrast To set the clock and the contrast while displaying the above illus trated page press the following mask appears PROG ESC Port xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Ver xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Addr VT xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Error xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Driver xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx TRAN PAGE PROG ESC SET CONTRAST ...

Page 405: ...th touch screen To set the clock touch the words SET CLOCK on the display the following mask appears Use the arrow for any variation see Chapter 37 Operation of terminal with touch screen Prepare the VT to receive the program To prepare the VT to receive the program while displaying the driver information page see Page 20 23 press and you will see the following mask ESC CONTRAST hh mm ss dd mm yy ...

Page 406: ...on page are PR ERR Problem Errors have been detected in the data exchange between the VT and the Device Solution Check the cable there may be disturbance COM BROKEN Problem Communication between VT and Device interrupted Solution Check the serial connection cable An error message followed by indicates that the error is not currently present but was and has since disappeared Example COM BROKEN When...

Page 407: ... To improve the quality of the representation on the display it may be neces sary to adjust its contrast This can be done by going to the page proposed see Page 20 25 and changing the value from 31 to 32 in evidence at that moment Increase the value to darken the display to lighten it decrease the value We advise this to be done at typical room temperature and with the terminal at operating temper...

Page 408: ......

Page 409: ...ions 21 4 Front view 21 8 Standard series rear view 21 9 CAN series rear view 21 10 Dimensions and Cut out 21 11 Accessories 21 12 Termination of CAN line 21 12 Transfer PC VT 21 13 Preparation for reception 21 13 Information relating to driver 21 16 Adjusting the contrast on the display 21 19 This chapter consists of 20 pages ...

Page 410: ...matic STN LCD 16 Colors STN LCD 16 Colors TFT Touch screen Matrix 20 x 8 Cell 12x16 pixels Representational format Graphic Resolution pixels 240 x 128 Rows by characters 16 x 40 8 x 20 4 x 10 Display area size mm 123 x 68 5 5 Character matrix in text mode pixels 6 x 8 12 x 16 24 x 32 Character size mm x 1 x 2 x 4 3 x 4 6 x 8 12 x 16 Contrast adjustment Software Automaticcompensationwithtemperature...

Page 411: ...ter 34 Clock Clock Hardware With back up battery Networks Integrated Profibus DP CAN Open Optoisolated interface Ethernet 10 100Mbit RJ45 Universal Bus Connector Optional See table Chapter 34 Proprietary networks ESA Net Network server Network client Technical data Power supply 24Vdc 18 32Vdc Power absorbed at 24Vdc 15W Protection fuse Ø5x20mm 800mA Quick Blow F Protection level IP65 front end Ope...

Page 412: ...recipe from data memory Command Modify password Command Next page Command Page help Command Password login Command Password logout Command Previous page Command Print alarm history Command Printer form feed Command Quit project Command Report Command Restarts reading time sampled trend Command Run pipeline Command Save alarms history and trend buffers in flash Command Save recipe in data memory Co...

Page 413: ...ction Go to page Function Internal command Function Invert bit value Function Macro Function None Function Reset bit permanently Function Reset real time bit Function Sequences Function Sets bit permanently Function Sets real time bit Function Value structure direct command Global configuration of E keys Global configuration of F keys Headers and footers Total Number of fields per H F 128 128 Info...

Page 414: ...NET network Number Total bytes 256 1024 Recipe field for recipe structure Recipes Number of variables per recipe 1024 256 Rectangles Redefinable characters Reports 128 Sequences Random Sequences Start stop Static bitmaps Symbolic field Bit group structured dynamic bitmaps 1024 Symbolic field Single bit structured dynamic bitmaps Symbolic field Value structured dynamic bitmaps System messages Syste...

Page 415: ...riables Limit values and linear scaling variables 96 x pages Variables Movement variable Mobile symbolic field Variables Threshold variables Variables Floating Point numerical variables Variables Numerical variables DEC HEX BIN BCD Variables String variables ASCII Table 21 1 Functions and objects realizable with this VT Part 4 of 4 Code of terminal VT555W Objects Functions Quantity Unless otherwis...

Page 416: ...CHAPTER 21 Video terminal VT555W 405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 21 8 Front view All buttons and signals are defined using the programming software see Software Manual VT555W ...

Page 417: ... NETWORK2 serial port for network communication Option C NETWORK1 serial port for network communication Option D ASP serial port for communicating with PC or other devices Option E MSP serial port for communicating with PLC PC F LPT port for connecting printer Option G Trimmer for brightness control G A C D E B F ...

Page 418: ...7 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 21 10 CAN series rear view Position Function A Power supply connector B CAN serial port C MSP serial port for communicating with PLC PC D LPT port for connecting printer Option E Trimmer for brightness control E A B C D ...

Page 419: ...405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 21 11 Dimensions and Cut out ...

Page 420: ...r Accessories Any accessories should be mounted in accordance with the instructions in the relevant chapter see Chapter 34 Video terminal accessories Termination of CAN line This paragraph applies only to the CAN series The VT in question inte grates the termination resistances of the serial line typically 120 ohms which can be inserted by means of a jumper preset on 1 2 line not termi nated To ac...

Page 421: ...of the three files in practice occurs with a single operation it will be defined as Project transfer for the sake of simplicity For this it is essential that the VT be prepared to receive the transfer See also Chapter 38 Command area Preparation for reception The program VTWIN see Software Manual must be used for the transfer but the terminal must be set up to receive This means carrying out the f...

Page 422: ...no Modem function Choose the port you intend to use for the transfer MSP or ASP touch the relevant on the display The VT is now ready to receive refer to Software Manual for transfer procedure VT555 TRANSFER PAGE Graphic controller BOOT check OK Graphic controller RAM check OK Graphic controller synchronization OK Main FIRMWARE check NOT PRESENT Graphic controller FIRMWARE ERROR SELECT MSP ASP EXI...

Page 423: ...he choice should be according to the speed you intend to use for the trans fer Slow 9600bit sec or Fast 38400bit sec touch the relevant on the display The VT is now ready to receive see Software Manual for the trans fer VT555 TRANSFER PAGE Graphic controller BOOT check OK Graphic controller RAM check OK Graphic controller synchronization OK Main FIRMWARE check NOT PRESENT Graphic controller FIRMWA...

Page 424: ...ast error to have occurred To acquire this information carry out the following operations Be situated in any page of the project Press two diagonally opposed angles that are free of any settable objects or buttons at least one angle must be free and there appears the following mask There is one of these pages for each communication port movement between the various pages is effected by pressing Po...

Page 425: ...rated page press the following mask appears To set the contrast touch the words SET CONTRAST on the display you will see the following mask Use the arrow for any variation see Chapter 37 Operation of terminal with touch screen To set the clock touch the words SET CLOCK on the display the following mask appears For the clock to be used properly a special battery has to be PROG ESC SET CONTRAST SET ...

Page 426: ...aying the driver information page see Page 21 16 press and you will see the following mask Which on screen you touch depends on the port you intend using The VT is now ready to receive refer to Software Manual for infor mation on the transfer procedure Once you enter this mask you can quit without transferring only by switching off and switching on the VT again or by pressing the EXIT ESC hh mm ss...

Page 427: ...nnection cable An error message followed by indicates that the error is not currently present but was and has since disappeared Example COM BROKEN When is pressed you quit the display of information regarding the driver Adjusting the contrast on the display To improve the quality of the representation on the display it may be neces sary to adjust its contrast This can be done by going to the page ...

Page 428: ......

Page 429: ...istics 22 2 Functions 22 4 Front view 22 8 Rear view 22 9 Dimensions and Cut out 22 10 Accessories 22 11 Transfer PC VT 22 11 Preparation for reception 22 12 Information relating to driver 22 13 Improving display color quality 22 18 Adjusting the contrast on the display 22 18 This chapter consists of 18 pages ...

Page 430: ...Colors STN LCD 16 Colors TFT Touch screen Matrix 20 x 16 Cell 16x15 pixels Representational format Graphic Resolution pixels 320 x 240 5 7 Rows x characters 16 x 40 8 x 20 4 x 10 Display area size mm 115 6 x 87 Character matrix in text mode pixels 8 x15 16 x 30 32 x 60 Character size mm x 1 x 2 x 4 2 8 x 5 2 5 6 x 10 4 11 2 x 20 8 Contrast adjustment Software Automatic compensation with temperatur...

Page 431: ...ories See table Chapter 34 Clock Clock Hardware With back up battery Networks Integrated Profibus DP CAN Open Optoisolated interface Ethernet 10 100Mbit RJ45 Universal Bus Connector Optional See table Chapter 34 Proprietary networks ESA Net Network server Network client Technical data Power supply 24Vdc 18 32Vdc Power absorbed at 24Vdc 15W Protection fuse Ø5x20mm 800mA Quick Blow F Protection leve...

Page 432: ...recipe from data memory Command Modify password Command Next page Command Page help Command Password login Command Password logout Command Previous page Command Print alarm history Command Printer form feed Command Quit project Command Report Command Restarts reading time sampled trend Command Run pipeline Command Save alarms history and trend buffers in flash Command Save recipe in data memory Co...

Page 433: ...ction Go to page Function Internal command Function Invert bit value Function Macro Function None Function Reset bit permanently Function Reset real time bit Function Sequences Function Sets bit permanently Function Sets real time bit Function Value structure direct command Global configuration of E keys Global configuration of F keys Headers and footers Total Number of fields per H F 128 128 Info...

Page 434: ...SANET network Number Total bytes 256 1024 Recipe field for recipe structure Recipes Number of variables per recipe 1024 512 Rectangles Redefinable characters Reports 128 Sequences Random Sequences Start stop Static bitmaps Symbolic field Bit group structured dynamic bitmaps 1024 Symbolic field Single bit structured dynamic bitmaps Symbolic field Value structured dynamic bitmaps System messages Sys...

Page 435: ...ariables Limit values and linear scaling variables 112xpages Variables Movement variable Mobile symbolic field Variables Threshold variables Variables Floating Point numerical variables Variables Numerical variables DEC HEX BIN BCD Variables String variables ASCII Table 22 1 Functions and objects realizable with this VT Part 4 of 4 Code of terminal VT560W Objects Functions Quantity Unless otherwis...

Page 436: ...CHAPTER 22 Video terminal VT560W 405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 22 8 Front view All buttons and signals are defined using the programming software see Software Manual ...

Page 437: ...1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 22 9 Rear view Position Function A Power supply connector B ASP serial port for communicating with PC or other devices C MSP serial port for communicating with PLC PC B C A ...

Page 438: ...CHAPTER 22 Video terminal VT560W 405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 22 10 Dimensions and Cut out ...

Page 439: ...he instructions in the relevant chapter see Chapter 34 Video terminal accessories Transfer PC VT For everything to function properly the first time the VT operator terminal is switched on it needs to be correctly loaded that is it needs to have trans ferred to it Firmware Communication driver Project Given that the transfer of the three files in practice occurs with a single operation it will be d...

Page 440: ...l connection between the PC and the VT Switch on the VT by pressing simultaneously on two diagonally opposed angles of the screen and wait a moment or using the appropriate button see Page 22 16 till the VT displays the following mask Choose the required transfer mode MODEM if you intend to use a modem or PC if you intend to use a serial port touch the relevant on the display VT560 TRANSFER PAGE G...

Page 441: ...ting to driver After the project has been transferred the VT can make available informa tion relating to what has been loaded The information regards Serial ports present The name of the driver loaded The version of the driver loaded Network address of the VT Last error to have occurred To acquire this information carry out the following operations Be situated in any page of the project Press two ...

Page 442: ...ation port movement between the various pages is effected by pressing From this page you can Set the clock and the contrast Prepare the VT to receive the program Use the Memory Card PROG ESC Port xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Ver xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Addr VT xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Error xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Driver xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx TRAN PAGE ...

Page 443: ... words SET CONTRAST on the display you will see the following mask Use the arrow for any variation see Chapter 37 Operation of terminal with touch screen To set the clock touch the words SET CLOCK on the display the following mask appears For the clock to be used properly a special battery has to be inserted in the terminal see Chapter 34 Video terminal PROG ESC SET CONTRAST SET CLOCK ddd dd mm yy...

Page 444: ...hile displaying the driver information page see Page 22 13 press and you will see the following mask The on screen to press depends on the port you intend to use MSP or ASP The VT terminal is now ready to receive consult Software Manual for information on the transmission procedure hh mm ss dd mm yy ESC TRAN PAGE VT560 TRANSFER PAGE Graphic controller BOOT check OK Graphic controller RAM check OK ...

Page 445: ...moCARD on the screen if the key is not on screen see Page 22 12 and the following mask will appear For the meaning and the functions of the keys see Chapter 34 Memory card TRAN PAGE VT560 TRANSFER PAGE Graphic controller BOOT check OK Graphic controller RAM check OK Main BOOT and RAM check WAIT SELECT MSP ASP EXIT MemoCARD MEMORY CARD MENU ERASE EXIT BACKUP RESTORE ...

Page 446: ... information regarding the driver Improving display color quality To improve the color quality adjust the contrast of the display if the colors are too dark increase the contrast if on the other hand the colors are too light decrease the contrast Adjusting the contrast on the display To improve the quality of the representation on the display it may be neces sary to adjust its contrast This can be...

Page 447: ...istics 23 2 Functions 23 4 Front view 23 8 Rear view 23 9 Dimensions and Cut out 23 10 Accessories 23 11 Transfer PC VT 23 11 Preparation for reception 23 12 Information relating to driver 23 15 Improving display color quality 23 19 Adjusting the contrast on the display 23 19 This chapter consists of 20 pages ...

Page 448: ...rey STN LCD 256 Colors STN LCD 256 Colors TFT Touch screen Matrix 20 x 16 Cell 16x15 pixels Representational format Graphic Resolution pixels 320 x 240 5 7 Rows x characters 16 x 40 8 x 20 4 x 10 Display area size mm 115 6 x 87 Character matrix in text mode pixels 8 x15 16 x 30 32 x 60 Character size mm x 1 x 2 x 4 2 8 x 5 2 5 6 x 10 4 11 2 x 20 8 Contrast adjustment Software Automatic compensatio...

Page 449: ...le Chapter 34 Clock Clock Hardware With back up battery Networks Integrated Profibus DP CAN Open Optoisolated interface Ethernet 10 100Mbit RJ45 Universal Bus Connector Optional See table Chapter 34 Proprietary networks ESA Net Network server Network client Technical data Power supply 24Vdc 18 32Vdc Power absorbed at 24Vdc 15W Protection fuse Ø5x20mm 800mA Quick Blow F Protection level IP65 front ...

Page 450: ...recipe from data memory Command Modify password Command Next page Command Page help Command Password login Command Password logout Command Previous page Command Print alarm history Command Printer form feed Command Quit project Command Report Command Restarts reading time sampled trend Command Run pipeline Command Save alarms history and trend buffers in flash Command Save recipe in data memory Co...

Page 451: ...ction Go to page Function Internal command Function Invert bit value Function Macro Function None Function Reset bit permanently Function Reset real time bit Function Sequences Function Sets bit permanently Function Sets real time bit Function Value structure direct command Global configuration of E keys Global configuration of F keys Headers and footers Total Number of fields per H F 128 128 Info...

Page 452: ...SANET network Number Total bytes 256 1024 Recipe field for recipe structure Recipes Number of variables per recipe 1024 512 Rectangles Redefinable characters Reports 128 Sequences Random Sequences Start stop Static bitmaps Symbolic field Bit group structured dynamic bitmaps 1024 Symbolic field Single bit structured dynamic bitmaps Symbolic field Value structured dynamic bitmaps System messages Sys...

Page 453: ...ariables Limit values and linear scaling variables 112xpages Variables Movement variable Mobile symbolic field Variables Threshold variables Variables Floating Point numerical variables Variables Numerical variables DEC HEX BIN BCD Variables String variables ASCII Table 23 1 Functions and objects realizable with this VT Part 4 of 4 Code of terminal VT565W Objects Functions Quantity Unless otherwis...

Page 454: ...CHAPTER 23 Video terminal VT565W 405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 23 8 Front view All buttons and signals are defined using the programming software see Software Manual VT565W ...

Page 455: ...ion A Power supply connector D ASP serial port for communicating with PC or other devices E MSP serial port for communicating with PLC PC F LPT port for connecting printer Optional G Trimmer for brightness control B W H Trimmer for brightness control Color D E F A G H ...

Page 456: ...CHAPTER 23 Video terminal VT565W 405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 23 10 Dimensions and Cut out ...

Page 457: ...he instructions in the relevant chapter see Chapter 34 Video terminal accessories Transfer PC VT For everything to function properly the first time the VT operator terminal is switched on it needs to be correctly loaded that is it needs to have trans ferred to it Firmware Communication driver Project Given that the transfer of the three files in practice occurs with a single operation it will be d...

Page 458: ...ction between the PC and the VT Switch on the VT by pressing simultaneously on two diagonally opposed angles of the screen and wait a moment or using the appropriate button see Page 23 17 till the VT displays the following mask VT terminal with no Modem function Choose the port you intend to use for the transfer MSP or ASP touch the relevant on the display The VT is now ready to receive refer to S...

Page 459: ... relevant on the display If the choose made is PC the VT is ready to receive see Software Manual for transfer if on the other hand you choose MODEM the following mask will appear VT565 TRANSFER PAGE Graphic controller BOOT check OK Graphic controller RAM check OK Main BOOT and RAM check WAIT SELECT MSP ASP EXIT MemoCARD VT565 TRANSFER PAGE Graphic controller BOOT check OK Graphic controller RAM ch...

Page 460: ...e speed you intend to use for the trans fer Slow 9600bit sec or Fast 38400bit sec touch the relevant on the display The VT is now ready to receive see Software Manual for the trans fer VT565 TRANSFER PAGE Graphic controller BOOT check OK Graphic controller RAM check OK Main BOOT and RAM check WAIT SELECT SLOW FAST ...

Page 461: ...on of the driver loaded Network address of the VT Last error to have occurred To acquire this information carry out the following operations Be situated in any page of the project Press two diagonally opposed angles that are free of any settable objects or buttons at least one angle must be free and you will see PROG ESC Port xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Ver xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Addr VT xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx...

Page 462: ... you can Set the clock and the contrast Prepare the VT to receive the program Use the Memory Card Setting the clock and the contrast To set the clock and the contrast while displaying the above illus trated page press the following mask appears To set the contrast touch the words SET CONTRAST on the display you will see the following mask PROG ESC SET CONTRAST SET CLOCK ddd dd mm yy hh mm ss ESC C...

Page 463: ... terminal see Chapter 34 Video terminal accessories Use the arrow for any variation see Chapter 37 Operation of terminal with touch screen Prepare the VT to receive the program To prepare the VT to receive the program while displaying the driver information page see Page 23 15 press and you will see the following mask hh mm ss dd mm yy ESC TRAN PAGE VT565 TRANSFER PAGE Graphic controller BOOT chec...

Page 464: ...ry Card While displaying the driver information page press and the fol lowing mask will appear Touch the MemoCARD on the screen if the key is not on screen see Page 23 12 and the following mask will appear For the meaning and the functions of the keys see Chapter 34 Memory card TRAN PAGE VT565 TRANSFER PAGE Graphic controller BOOT check OK Graphic controller RAM check OK Main BOOT and RAM check WA...

Page 465: ...arding the driver Improving display color quality To improve the color quality adjust the contrast of the display if the colors are too dark increase the contrast if on the other hand the colors are too light decrease the contrast Adjusting the contrast on the display To improve the quality of the representation on the display it may be neces sary to adjust its contrast This can be done by going t...

Page 466: ......

Page 467: ...4 10 CAN series rear view 24 11 Ethernet series rear view 24 12 Dimensions and Cut out 24 13 Accessories 24 14 Calibration of Touch Screen 24 14 Termination of CAN line 24 17 Introducing the MAC address 24 18 Transfer PC VT 24 21 Preparation for reception 24 21 Information relating to driver 24 23 Improving display color quality 24 29 Adjusting the contrast on the display 24 29 This chapter consis...

Page 468: ... 256 Colors STN LCD 256 Colors TFT Touch screen cells Matrix 40x30 Cell 16x16 pixels Representational format Graphic Resolution pixels 640 x 480 7 5 Rows per character 30 x 80 15 x 40 7 x 20 Dimension of visible area mm 158 x 118 Character matrix in text mode pixels 8 x16 16 x 32 32 x 64 Character size mm x1 x2 x4 1 89 x 3 79 3 79 x 7 58 7 58 x 15 16 Contrast adjustment Software Automatic compensa...

Page 469: ...Chapter 34 Clock Clock Hardware withSupercapacitor Min 72hTypically130h Networks Integrated Profibus DP CAN Open Optoisolated interface Ethernet 10 100Mbit RJ45 Universal Bus Connector Optional See table Chapter 34 Proprietary networks ESA Net Network server Network client Technical data Power supply 24Vdc 18 32Vdc Power absorbed at 24Vdc 15W Protection fuse Ø5x20mm 1 25A Quick Blow F Protection l...

Page 470: ...ecipe from data memory Command Modify password Command Next page Command Page help Command Password login Command Password logout Command Previous page Command Print alarm history Command Printer form feed Command Quit project Command Report Command Restarts reading time sampled trend Command Run pipeline Command Save alarms history and trend buffers in flash Command Save recipe in data memory Com...

Page 471: ...ction Go to page Function Internal command Function Invert bit value Function Macro Function None Function Reset bit permanently Function Reset real time bit Function Sequences Function Sets bit permanently Function Sets real time bit Function Value structure direct command Global configuration of E keys Global configuration of F keys Headers and footers Total Number of fields per H F 128 128 Info...

Page 472: ... ESANET network Number Total bytes 512 1024 Recipe field for recipe structure Recipes Number of variables per recipe 1024 512 Rectangles Redefinable characters Reports 128 Sequences Random Sequences Start stop Static bitmaps Symbolic field Bit group structured dynamic bitmaps 1024 Symbolic field Single bit structured dynamic bitmaps Symbolic field Value structured dynamic bitmaps System messages S...

Page 473: ...ariables Limit values and linear scaling variables 256 x pages Variables Movement variable Mobile symbolic field Variables Threshold variables Variables Floating Point numerical variables Variables Numerical variables DEC HEX BIN BCD Variables String variables ASCII Table 24 1 Functions and objects realizable with this VT Part 4 of 4 Code of terminal VT575W Objects Functions Quantity Unless otherw...

Page 474: ...CHAPTER 24 Video terminal VT575W 405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 24 8 Front view All buttons and signals are defined via the programming software see Soft ware Manual ...

Page 475: ...02 2008 24 9 Standard series rear view Position Function A Power supply connector B LPT port for connecting printer C MSP serial port for communicating with PLC PC D ASP serial port for communicating with PC or other devices A B C D ...

Page 476: ...200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 24 10 Profibus DP series rear view Position Function A Power supply connector B LPT port for connecting printer C MSP serial port for communicating with PLC PC D Serial port for network communication A B C D ...

Page 477: ...0 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 24 11 CAN series rear view Position Function A Power supply connector B LPT port for connecting printer C MSP serial port for communicating with PLC PC D CAN serial port A B C D ...

Page 478: ...008 24 12 Ethernet series rear view Position Function A Power supply connector B LPT port for connecting printer C MSP serial port for communicating with PLC PC D Ethernet network 10 100Mbit RJ45 For the diagnostic mode of the LEDs see Chapter 31 Ethernet port A B C D ...

Page 479: ...405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 24 13 Dimensions and Cut out ...

Page 480: ...in the relevant chapter see Chapter 34 Video terminal accessories Calibration of Touch Screen The screen of VT575W is made of resistive sensitive glass for this type of glass to work properly it requires a calibration procedure the terminal is already calibrated when supplied that is the resistive area of the glass has to be adjusted to the visible are of the display Should it be thought necessary...

Page 481: ... procedure Make sure the VT is not connected to the power supply Remove the back cover Identify jumper J11 Position J11 on pins 2 3 C Reconnect the power supply and switch on the terminal the following mask appears C J11 3 2 1 TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION Please touch bottom left ...

Page 482: ...he corner indicated in the figure then the following page appears on screen Touch the corner indicated in the figure to complete the Calibrazione procedure the following page now appears TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION Please touch top right TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION please touch bottom right ...

Page 483: ...n has be carried out wrongly or imprecisely repeat the procedure Termination of CAN line This paragraph applies only to the CAN series The VT in question inte grates the termination resistances of the serial line typically 120 ohms which can be inserted by means of a jumper preset on 1 2 line not termi nated To activate the termination Make sure the device is not connected to the power supply Remo...

Page 484: ...ctedintheEther net network The terminal is acquired with the address already programmed and is shown on the display of the terminal in the transfer page The MAC address is permanently memorized in the terminal but should it T J14 3 2 1 VT575W ETHERNET TRANSFER PAGE Touch screen BOOT check OK Graphic controller BOOT check OK Graphic controller RAM check OK Main BOOT and RAM check OK Graphic control...

Page 485: ...ro ceed as follows Check that the VT is not connected to the power supply Remove the back cover Locate the label carrying the MAC address Make a note of the number on the label e g 00 0E 0E 00 00 01 00 0E 0E fixed part that identifying as an ESA product xx xx xx variable part different for each terminal Reconnect the power supply to the terminal and if necessary calibrate the touch screen see Page...

Page 486: ...Once the address has been con firmed the following page is displayed The procedure is now terminated Should a wrong MAC address have been inserted contact the ESA Customer Care Department Enter a valid MAC address 00 0E 0E 00 00 00 VT575W ETHERNET TRANSFER PAGE SELECT MAC addr 00 0E 0E 00 00 01 MSP EXIT MemoCARD ...

Page 487: ...ll be defined as Project transfer for the sake of simplicity For this it is essential that the VT be prepared to receive the transfer See also Chapter 38 Command area Preparation for reception The programme VTWIN must be used for the transfer see Software Man ual but the terminal must be prepared for reception This means carrying out the following steps Check that the VT is off Check that there is...

Page 488: ...he Memory Card has been inserted in the VT see Page 24 27 VT575W TRANSFER PAGE Touch screen BOOT check OK Graphic controller BOOT check OK Graphic controller RAM check OK Main BOOT and RAM check OK Graphic controller synchronization OK Main FIRMWARE check NOT PRESENT Graphic controller FIRMWARE ERROR SELECT MSP ASP EXIT MemoCARD VT575W TRANSFER PAGE Touch screen BOOT check OK Graphic controller BO...

Page 489: ...e trans fer Information relating to driver After the project has been transferred the VT can make available informa tion relating to what has been loaded The information regards Serial ports present The name of the driver loaded The version of the driver loaded Network address of the VT Last error to have occurred To acquire this information carry out the following operations Be situated in any pa...

Page 490: ...le must be free and you will see There is one of these pages for each communication port movement between the various pages is effected by pressing PROG ESC Port xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Ver xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Addr VT xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Error xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Driver xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx TRAN PAGE ...

Page 491: ...he program Use the Memory Card Setting the clock and the contrast To set the clock and the contrast while displaying the above illus trated page press the following mask appears To set the contrast touch the words SET CONTRAST on the display you will see the following mask PROG ESC SET CONTRAST SET CLOCK ddd dd mm yy hh mm ss ...

Page 492: ... 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 24 26 Use the arrow for any variation see Chapter 37 Operation of terminal with touch screen To set the clock touch the words SET CLOCK on the display the following mask appears ESC CONTRAST hh mm ss dd mm yy ESC ...

Page 493: ... following mask The on screen to press depends on the port you intend to use MSP or ASP The VT terminal is now ready to receive consult Software Manual for information on the transmission procedure Using the Memory Card While displaying the driver information page press and the fol lowing mask will appear TRAN PAGE VT575W TRANSFER PAGE Touch screen BOOT check OK Graphic controller BOOT check OK Gr...

Page 494: ...n see Page 24 21 and the following mask will appear For the meaning and the functions of the keys see Chapter 34 Memory card VT575W TRANSFER PAGE Touch screen BOOT check OK Graphic controller BOOT check OK Graphic controller RAM check OK Main BOOT and RAM check WAIT SELECT MSP ASP EXIT MemoCARD MEMORY CARD MENU EXIT RESTORE ERASE BACKUP ...

Page 495: ...arding the driver Improving display color quality To improve the color quality adjust the contrast of the display if the colors are too dark increase the contrast if on the other hand the colors are too light decrease the contrast Adjusting the contrast on the display To improve the quality of the representation on the display it may be neces sary to adjust its contrast This can be done by going t...

Page 496: ......

Page 497: ...5 10 CAN series rear view 25 11 Ethernet series rear view 25 12 Dimensions and Cut out 25 13 Accessories 25 14 Calibration of Touch Screen 25 14 Termination of CAN line 25 17 Introducing the MAC address 25 18 Transfer PC VT 25 21 Preparation for reception 25 21 Information relating to driver 25 23 Improving display color quality 25 29 Adjusting the contrast on the display 25 29 This chapter consis...

Page 498: ... 256 Colors STN LCD 256 Colors TFT Touch screen cells Matrix 50x40 Cell 16x15 pixels Representational format Graphic Resolution pixels 800 x 600 8 4 Rows per character 40 x 100 20 x 50 10 x 25 Dimension of visible area mm 174 8 x 131 2 Character matrix in text mode pixels 8 x15 16 x 30 32 x 60 Character size mm x1 x2 x4 1 7 x 3 2 3 4 x 6 4 6 8 x 12 8 Contrast adjustment Software Automatic compensa...

Page 499: ...Chapter 34 Clock Clock Hardware withSupercapacitor Min 72hTypically130h Networks Integrated Profibus DP CAN Open Optoisolated interface Ethernet 10 100Mbit RJ45 Universal Bus Connector Optional See table Chapter 34 Proprietary networks ESA Net Network server Network client Technical data Power supply 24Vdc 18 32Vdc Power absorbed at 24Vdc 15W Protection fuse Ø5x20mm 1 25A Quick Blow F Protection l...

Page 500: ...ecipe from data memory Command Modify password Command Next page Command Page help Command Password login Command Password logout Command Previous page Command Print alarm history Command Printer form feed Command Quit project Command Report Command Restarts reading time sampled trend Command Run pipeline Command Save alarms history and trend buffers in flash Command Save recipe in data memory Com...

Page 501: ...ction Go to page Function Internal command Function Invert bit value Function Macro Function None Function Reset bit permanently Function Reset real time bit Function Sequences Function Sets bit permanently Function Sets real time bit Function Value structure direct command Global configuration of E keys Global configuration of F keys Headers and footers Total Number of fields per H F 128 128 Info...

Page 502: ... ESANET network Number Total bytes 512 1024 Recipe field for recipe structure Recipes Number of variables per recipe 1024 512 Rectangles Redefinable characters Reports 128 Sequences Random Sequences Start stop Static bitmaps Symbolic field Bit group structured dynamic bitmaps 1024 Symbolic field Single bit structured dynamic bitmaps Symbolic field Value structured dynamic bitmaps System messages S...

Page 503: ...ariables Limit values and linear scaling variables 256 x pages Variables Movement variable Mobile symbolic field Variables Threshold variables Variables Floating Point numerical variables Variables Numerical variables DEC HEX BIN BCD Variables String variables ASCII Table 25 1 Functions and objects realizable with this VT Part 4 of 4 Code of terminal VT580W Objects Functions Quantity Unless otherw...

Page 504: ...CHAPTER 25 Video terminal VT580W 405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 25 8 Front view All buttons and signals are defined via the programming software see Soft ware Manual ...

Page 505: ...02 2008 25 9 Standard series rear view Position Function A Power supply connector B LPT port for connecting printer C MSP serial port for communicating with PLC PC D ASP serial port for communicating with PC or other devices A B C D ...

Page 506: ...200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 25 10 Profibus DP series rear view Position Function A Power supply connector B LPT port for connecting printer C MSP serial port for communicating with PLC PC D Serial port for network communication A B C D ...

Page 507: ...0 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 25 11 CAN series rear view Position Function A Power supply connector B LPT port for connecting printer C MSP serial port for communicating with PLC PC D CAN serial port A B C D ...

Page 508: ...008 25 12 Ethernet series rear view Position Function A Power supply connector B LPT port for connecting printer C MSP serial port for communicating with PLC PC D Ethernet network 10 100Mbit RJ45 For the diagnostic mode of the LEDs see Chapter 31 Ethernet port A B C D ...

Page 509: ...405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 25 13 Dimensions and Cut out ...

Page 510: ...in the relevant chapter see Chapter 34 Video terminal accessories Calibration of Touch Screen The screen of VT580W is made of resistive sensitive glass for this type of glass to work properly it requires a calibration procedure the terminal is already calibrated when supplied that is the resistive area of the glass has to be adjusted to the visible are of the display Should it be thought necessary...

Page 511: ... procedure Make sure the VT is not connected to the power supply Remove the back cover Identify jumper J11 Position J11 on pins 2 3 C Reconnect the power supply and switch on the terminal the following mask appears C J11 3 2 1 TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION Please touch bottom left ...

Page 512: ...he corner indicated in the figure then the following page appears on screen Touch the corner indicated in the figure to complete the Calibrazione procedure the following page now appears TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION Please touch top right TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION please touch bottom right ...

Page 513: ...n has be carried out wrongly or imprecisely repeat the procedure Termination of CAN line This paragraph applies only to the CAN series The VT in question inte grates the termination resistances of the serial line typically 120 ohms which can be inserted by means of a jumper preset on 1 2 line not termi nated To activate the termination Make sure the device is not connected to the power supply Remo...

Page 514: ...ctedintheEther net network The terminal is acquired with the address already programmed and is shown on the display of the terminal in the transfer page The MAC address is permanently memorized in the terminal but should it T J14 3 2 1 VT580W ETHERNET TRANSFER PAGE Touch screen BOOT check OK Graphic controller BOOT check OK Graphic controller RAM check OK Main BOOT and RAM check OK Graphic control...

Page 515: ...ro ceed as follows Check that the VT is not connected to the power supply Remove the back cover Locate the label carrying the MAC address Make a note of the number on the label e g 00 0E 0E 00 00 01 00 0E 0E fixed part that identifying as an ESA product xx xx xx variable part different for each terminal Reconnect the power supply to the terminal and if necessary calibrate the touch screen see Page...

Page 516: ...Once the address has been con firmed the following page is displayed The procedure is now terminated Should a wrong MAC address have been inserted contact the ESA Customer Care Department Enter a valid MAC address 00 0E 0E 00 00 00 VT580W ETHERNET TRANSFER PAGE SELECT MAC addr 00 0E 0E 00 00 01 MSP EXIT MemoCARD ...

Page 517: ...ll be defined as Project transfer for the sake of simplicity For this it is essential that the VT be prepared to receive the transfer See also Chapter 38 Command area Preparation for reception The programme VTWIN must be used for the transfer see Software Man ual but the terminal must be prepared for reception This means carrying out the following steps Check that the VT is off Check that there is...

Page 518: ...he Memory Card has been inserted in the VT see Page 25 27 VT580W TRANSFER PAGE Touch screen BOOT check OK Graphic controller BOOT check OK Graphic controller RAM check OK Main BOOT and RAM check OK Graphic controller synchronization OK Main FIRMWARE check NOT PRESENT Graphic controller FIRMWARE ERROR SELECT MSP ASP EXIT MemoCARD VT580W TRANSFER PAGE Touch screen BOOT check OK Graphic controller BO...

Page 519: ...e trans fer Information relating to driver After the project has been transferred the VT can make available informa tion relating to what has been loaded The information regards Serial ports present The name of the driver loaded The version of the driver loaded Network address of the VT Last error to have occurred To acquire this information carry out the following operations Be situated in any pa...

Page 520: ...le must be free and you will see There is one of these pages for each communication port movement between the various pages is effected by pressing PROG ESC Port xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Ver xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Addr VT xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Error xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Driver xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx TRAN PAGE ...

Page 521: ...he program Use the Memory Card Setting the clock and the contrast To set the clock and the contrast while displaying the above illus trated page press the following mask appears To set the contrast touch the words SET CONTRAST on the display you will see the following mask PROG ESC SET CONTRAST SET CLOCK ddd dd mm yy hh mm ss ...

Page 522: ... 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 25 26 Use the arrow for any variation see Chapter 37 Operation of terminal with touch screen To set the clock touch the words SET CLOCK on the display the following mask appears ESC CONTRAST hh mm ss dd mm yy ESC ...

Page 523: ... following mask The on screen to press depends on the port you intend to use MSP or ASP The VT terminal is now ready to receive consult Software Manual for information on the transmission procedure Using the Memory Card While displaying the driver information page press and the fol lowing mask will appear TRAN PAGE VT580W TRANSFER PAGE Touch screen BOOT check OK Graphic controller BOOT check OK Gr...

Page 524: ...n see Page 25 21 and the following mask will appear For the meaning and the functions of the keys see Chapter 34 Memory card VT580W TRANSFER PAGE Touch screen BOOT check OK Graphic controller BOOT check OK Graphic controller RAM check OK Main BOOT and RAM check WAIT SELECT MSP ASP EXIT MemoCARD MEMORY CARD MENU EXIT RESTORE ERASE BACKUP ...

Page 525: ...improve the color quality adjust the contrast of the display if the colors are too dark increase the contrast if on the other hand the colors are too light decrease the contrast Adjusting the contrast on the display To improve the quality of the representation on the display it may be neces sary to adjust its contrast This can be done by going to the page proposed see Page 25 25 and changing the v...

Page 526: ......

Page 527: ... Standard series rear view 26 10 CAN series rear view 26 11 Dimensions and Cut out 26 12 Accessories 26 13 Calibration of Touch Screen 26 13 Termination of CAN line 26 18 Transfer PC VT 26 19 Preparation for reception 26 19 Information relating to driver 26 22 Improving display color quality 26 28 Adjusting the contrast on the display 26 28 This chapter consists of 28 pages ...

Page 528: ...rs STN LCD 256 Colors TFT Touch screen cells Matrix 40x30 Cell 16x16 pixels Representational format Graphic Resolution pixels 640 x 480 10 4 Rows per character 30 x 80 15 x 40 7 x 20 Dimension of visible area mm 211 2 x 158 211 2 x 158 4 Character matrix in text mode pixels 8 x16 16 x 32 32 x 64 Character size mm x1 x2 x4 2 7 x 5 4 5 4 x 10 7 10 7 x 21 4 Contrast adjustment Software Automatic comp...

Page 529: ...le accessories See table Chapter 34 Clock Hardware clock With back up battery Networks Integrated Profibus DP CAN Open Optoisolated interface Ethernet 10 100Mbit RJ45 Universal Bus Connector Optional See table Chapter 34 Proprietary networks ESA Net Network server Network client Technical data Power supply 24Vdc 18 32Vdc Power absorbed at 24Vdc 15W Protection fuse Ø5x20mm 1 25A Quick Blow F Protec...

Page 530: ...ecipe from data memory Command Modify password Command Next page Command Page help Command Password login Command Password logout Command Previous page Command Print alarm history Command Printer form feed Command Quit project Command Report Command Restarts reading time sampled trend Command Run pipeline Command Save alarms history and trend buffers in flash Command Save recipe in data memory Com...

Page 531: ...nction Go to page Function Internal command Function Invert bit value Function Macro Function None Function Reset bit permanently Function Reset real time bit Function Sequences Function Sets bit permanently Function Sets real time bit Function Value structure direct command Global configuration of E keys Global configuration of F keys Headers and footers Total Number of fields per H F 128 128 Inf...

Page 532: ... ESANET network Number Total bytes 512 1024 Recipe field for recipe structure Recipes Number of variables per recipe 1024 512 Rectangles Redefinable characters Reports 128 Sequences Random Sequences Start stop Static bitmaps Symbolic field Bit group structured dynamic bitmaps 1024 Symbolic field Single bit structured dynamic bitmaps Symbolic field Value structured dynamic bitmaps System messages S...

Page 533: ...ariables Limit values and linear scaling variables 304 x pages Variables Movement variable Mobile symbolic field Variables Threshold variables Variables Floating Point numerical variables Variables Numerical variables DEC HEX BIN BCD Variables String variables ASCII Table 26 1 Functions and objects realizable with this VT Part 4 of 4 Code of terminal VT585W Objects Functions Quantity Unless otherw...

Page 534: ...CHAPTER 26 Video terminal VT585W 405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 26 8 Front view All buttons and signals are defined via the programming software see Soft ware Manual VT585W ...

Page 535: ... total thickness of the label must not exceed 125µm microme ters Do not use either stiff materials or glues Before starting to insert the customized label see Chapter 29 Inserting customized labels Position Function Dimensions L x H mm 1 ESA Logo VT Model 160 x 12 1 ...

Page 536: ...0 Standard series rear view Position Function A Auxiliary port for connecting optional accessories B LPT port for connecting printer C ASP serial port for communicating with PC or other devices D MSP serial port for communicating with PLC PC E Power supply connector A C D B E ...

Page 537: ...008 26 11 CAN series rear view Position Function A Auxiliary port for connecting optional accessories B LPT port for connecting printer D MSP serial port for communicating with PLC PC E CAN serial port F Power supply connector A D B E F ...

Page 538: ...CHAPTER 26 Video terminal VT585W 405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 26 12 Dimensions and Cut out ...

Page 539: ...hapter 34 Video terminal accessories Calibration of Touch Screen The screen of VT585W is made of resistive sensitive glass for this type of glass to work properly it requires a calibration procedure the terminal is already calibrated when supplied that is the resistive area of the glass has to be adjusted to the visible are of the display Should it be thought necessary to repeat the calibration pr...

Page 540: ...n procedure Make sure the VT is not connected to the power supply Remove the back cover Identify jumpers JP5 and JP12 Position JP5 and JP12 on pins 2 3 Reconnect the power supply and switch on the terminal the following mask appears the number and type of mask depend on the release ver sion of the terminal ...

Page 541: ... figure then the following page appears on screen Touch the corner indicated in the figure to complete the Calibrazione procedure the following page now appears VT585W TRANSFER PAGE Touch screen BOOT check Please touch bottom left VT585W TRANSFER PAGE Touch screen BOOT check Please touch top right ...

Page 542: ...02 2008 26 16 Release 5 3 or later Touch the corner indicated in the figure then the following page appears on screen VT585W TRANSFER PAGE Touch screen BOOT check Please wait TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION current parameters xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx please TOUCH bottom left X ...

Page 543: ...en Touch the corner indicated in the figure to complete the calibration pro cedure Wait a few moments until the VT displays either the following TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION current parameters xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx Please TOUCH top right X TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION current parameters xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx please TOUCH bottom right X ...

Page 544: ...he CAN series The VT in question inte grates the termination resistances of the serial line typically 120 ohms which can be inserted by means of a jumper preset on 1 2 line not termi nated To activate the termination Make sure the device is not connected to the power supply Remove the cover Identify the jumper unit J6 VT585W TRANSFER PAGE Touch screen BOOT check OK Graphic controller BOOT check OK...

Page 545: ...on driver Project Given that the transfer of the three files in practice occurs with a single operation it will be defined as Project transfer for the sake of simplicity For this it is essential that the VT be prepared to receive the transfer See also Chapter 38 Command area Preparation for reception The programme VTWIN must be used for the transfer see Software Man ual but the terminal must be pr...

Page 546: ...r needs to be free and wait a few moments alternatively use the button provided see Page 26 19 until the VT displays the following mask VT terminal with no Modem function Choose the port you intend to use for the transfer MSP or ASP touch the relevant on the display The VT is now ready to receive refer to Software Manual for transfer procedure The MemoCARD appears if the Memory Card has been inser...

Page 547: ...creen BOOT check OK Graphic controller BOOT check OK Graphic controller RAM check OK Main BOOT and RAM check OK Graphic controller synchronization OK Main FIRMWARE check NOT PRESENT Graphic controller FIRMWARE ERROR SELECT MSP ASP EXIT MemoCARD VT585W TRANSFER PAGE Touch screen BOOT check OK Graphic controller BOOT check OK Graphic controller RAM check OK Main BOOT and RAM check OK Graphic control...

Page 548: ...rred the VT can make available informa tion relating to what has been loaded The information regards Serial ports present The name of the driver loaded The version of the driver loaded Network address of the VT Last error to have occurred To acquire this information carry out the following operations Be situated in any page of the project Press two diagonally opposed angles that are free of any se...

Page 549: ... is one of these pages for each communication port movement between the various pages is effected by pressing PROG ESC Port xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Ver xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Addr VT xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Error xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Driver xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx TRAN PAGE ...

Page 550: ... VT to receive the program Use the Memory Card Setting the clock and the contrast To set the clock and the contrast while displaying the above illus trated page press the following mask appears To set the contrast touch the words SET CONTRAST on the display you will see the following mask PROG ESC SET CONTRAST SET CLOCK ddd dd mm yy hh mm ss ...

Page 551: ...of 25 02 2008 26 25 Use the arrow for any variation see Chapter 37 Operation of terminal with touch screen To set the clock touch the words SET CLOCK on the display the following mask appears ESC CONTRAST hh mm ss dd mm yy ESC ...

Page 552: ... displaying the driver information page see Page 26 22 press and you will see the following mask The on screen to press depends on the port you intend to use MSP or ASP The VT terminal is now ready to receive consult Software Manual for information on the transmission procedure Using the Memory Card While displaying the driver information page press and the fol lowing mask will appear TRAN PAGE VT...

Page 553: ...and the following mask will appear For the meaning and the functions of the keys see Chapter 34 Memory card VT585W TRANSFER PAGE Touch screen BOOT check OK Graphic controller BOOT check OK Graphic controller RAM check OK Main BOOT and RAM check WAIT SELECT MSP ASP EXIT MemoCARD MEMORY CARD MENU EXIT RESTORE ERASE BACKUP ...

Page 554: ...color quality To improve the color quality adjust the contrast of the display if the colors are too dark increase the contrast if on the other hand the colors are too light decrease the contrast Adjusting the contrast on the display To improve the quality of the representation on the display it may be neces sary to adjust its contrast This can be done by going to the page proposed see Page 26 24 a...

Page 555: ...27 10 CAN series rear view 27 11 Ethernet series rear view 27 12 Dimensions and Cut out 27 13 Accessories 27 14 Calibration of Touch Screen 27 14 Termination of CAN line 27 17 Introducing the MAC address 27 18 Transfer PC VT 27 21 Preparation for reception 27 21 Information relating to driver 27 23 Improving display color quality 27 29 Adjusting the contrast on the display 27 29 This chapter consi...

Page 556: ...splay Type LCD Monochromatic STN LCD 256 Colors STN LCD 256 Colors TFT Touch screen cells Matrix 40x30 Cell 16x16 pixels Representational format Graphic Resolution pixels 640 x 480 10 4 Rows per character 30 x 80 15 x 40 7 x 20 Dimension of visible area mm 211 2 x 158 Character matrix in text mode pixels 8 x16 16 x 32 32 x 64 Character size mm x1 x2 x4 2 7 x 5 4 5 4 x 10 7 10 7 x 21 4 Contrast adj...

Page 557: ...es Connectable accessories See table Chapter 34 Clock Clock Hardware withSupercapacitor Min 72hTypically130h Networks Integrated Profibus DP CAN Open Optoisolated interface Ethernet 10 100Mbit RJ45 Universal Bus Connector Optional See table Chapter 34 Proprietary networks ESA Net Network server Network client Technical data Power supply 24Vdc 18 32Vdc Power absorbed at 24Vdc 15W Protection fuse Ø5...

Page 558: ... recipe from data memory Command Modify password Command Next page Command Page help Command Password login Command Password logout Command Previous page Command Print alarm history Command Printer form feed Command Quit project Command Report Command Restarts reading time sampled trend Command Run pipeline Command Save alarms history and trend buffers in flash Command Save recipe in data memory C...

Page 559: ...tion Go to page Function Internal command Function Invert bit value Function Macro Function None Function Reset bit permanently Function Reset real time bit Function Sequences Function Sets bit permanently Function Sets real time bit Function Value structure direct command Global configuration of E keys Global configuration of F keys Headers and footers Total Number of fields per H F 128 128 Info ...

Page 560: ... ESANET network Number Total bytes 512 1024 Recipe field for recipe structure Recipes Number of variables per recipe 1024 512 Rectangles Redefinable characters Reports 128 Sequences Random Sequences Start stop Static bitmaps Symbolic field Bit group structured dynamic bitmaps 1024 Symbolic field Single bit structured dynamic bitmaps Symbolic field Value structured dynamic bitmaps System messages S...

Page 561: ...riables Limit values and linear scaling variables 320 x pages Variables Movement variable Mobile symbolic field Variables Threshold variables Variables Floating Point numerical variables Variables Numerical variables DEC HEX BIN BCD Variables String variables ASCII Table 27 1 Functions and objects realizable with this VT Part 4 of 4 Code of terminal VT585W B Objects Functions Quantity Unless other...

Page 562: ...CHAPTER 27 Video terminal VT585WB 405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 27 8 Front view All buttons and signals are defined via the programming software see Soft ware Manual ...

Page 563: ...02 2008 27 9 Standard series rear view Position Function A Power supply connector B LPT port for connecting printer C MSP serial port for communicating with PLC PC D ASP serial port for communicating with PC or other devices A D C B ...

Page 564: ...200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 27 10 Profibus DP series rear view Position Function A Power supply connector B LPT port for connecting printer C MSP serial port for communicating with PLC PC D Serial port for network communication A D C B ...

Page 565: ...0 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 27 11 CAN series rear view Position Function A Power supply connector B LPT port for connecting printer C MSP serial port for communicating with PLC PC D CAN serial port A D C B ...

Page 566: ...2008 27 12 Ethernet series rear view Position Function A Power supply connector B LPT port for connecting printer C MSP serial port for communicating with PLC PC D Ethernet network 10 100Mbit RJ45 For the diagnostic mode of the LEDs see Chapter 31 Ethernet port A D C B ...

Page 567: ...405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 27 13 Dimensions and Cut out ...

Page 568: ...in the relevant chapter see Chapter 34 Video terminal accessories Calibration of Touch Screen The screen of VT585WB is made of resistive sensitive glass for this type of glass to work properly it requires a calibration procedure the terminal is already calibrated when supplied that is the resistive area of the glass has to be adjusted to the visible are of the display Should it be thought necessar...

Page 569: ... procedure Make sure the VT is not connected to the power supply Remove the back cover Identify jumper J11 Position J11 on pins 2 3 C Reconnect the power supply and switch on the terminal the following mask appears C J11 3 2 1 TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION Please touch bottom left ...

Page 570: ...the corner indicated in the figure then the following page appears on screen Touch the corner indicated in the figure to complete the Calibrazione procedure the following page now appears TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION Please touch top right TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION please touch bottom right ...

Page 571: ...n has be carried out wrongly or imprecisely repeat the procedure Termination of CAN line This paragraph applies only to the CAN series The VT in question inte grates the termination resistances of the serial line typically 120 ohms which can be inserted by means of a jumper preset on 1 2 line not termi nated To activate the termination Make sure the device is not connected to the power supply Remo...

Page 572: ...ctedintheEther net network The terminal is acquired with the address already programmed and is shown on the display of the terminal in the transfer page The MAC address is permanently memorized in the terminal but should it T J14 3 2 1 VT585WB ETHERNET TRANSFER PAGE Touch screen BOOT check OK Graphic controller BOOT check OK Graphic controller RAM check OK Main BOOT and RAM check OK Graphic contro...

Page 573: ...ro ceed as follows Check that the VT is not connected to the power supply Remove the back cover Locate the label carrying the MAC address Make a note of the number on the label e g 00 0E 0E 00 00 01 00 0E 0E fixed part that identifying as an ESA product xx xx xx variable part different for each terminal Reconnect the power supply to the terminal and if necessary calibrate the touch screen see Page...

Page 574: ...Once the address has been con firmed the following page is displayed The procedure is now terminated Should a wrong MAC address have been inserted contact the ESA Customer Care Department Enter a valid MAC address 00 0E 0E 00 00 00 VT585WB ETHERNET TRANSFER PAGE SELECT MAC addr 00 0E 0E 00 00 01 MSP EXIT MemoCARD ...

Page 575: ...ll be defined as Project transfer for the sake of simplicity For this it is essential that the VT be prepared to receive the transfer See also Chapter 38 Command area Preparation for reception The programme VTWIN must be used for the transfer see Software Man ual but the terminal must be prepared for reception This means carrying out the following steps Check that the VT is off Check that there is...

Page 576: ...he Memory Card has been inserted in the VT see Page 27 27 VT585WB TRANSFER PAGE Touch screen BOOT check OK Graphic controller BOOT check OK Graphic controller RAM check OK Main BOOT and RAM check OK Graphic controller synchronization OK Main FIRMWARE check NOT PRESENT Graphic controller FIRMWARE ERROR SELECT MSP ASP EXIT MemoCARD VT585WB TRANSFER PAGE Touch screen BOOT check OK Graphic controller ...

Page 577: ...e trans fer Information relating to driver After the project has been transferred the VT can make available informa tion relating to what has been loaded The information regards Serial ports present The name of the driver loaded The version of the driver loaded Network address of the VT Last error to have occurred To acquire this information carry out the following operations Be situated in any pa...

Page 578: ...le must be free and you will see There is one of these pages for each communication port movement between the various pages is effected by pressing PROG ESC Port xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Ver xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Addr VT xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Error xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Driver xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx TRAN PAGE ...

Page 579: ...he program Use the Memory Card Setting the clock and the contrast To set the clock and the contrast while displaying the above illus trated page press the following mask appears To set the contrast touch the words SET CONTRAST on the display you will see the following mask PROG ESC SET CONTRAST SET CLOCK ddd dd mm yy hh mm ss ...

Page 580: ...02 2008 27 26 Use the arrow for any variation see Chapter 37 Operation of terminal with touch screen To set the clock touch the words SET CLOCK on the display the following mask appears ESC CONTRAST SET CONTRAST SET CLOCK ddd dd mm yy hh mm ss hh mm ss dd mm yy ESC ...

Page 581: ... following mask The on screen to press depends on the port you intend to use MSP or ASP The VT terminal is now ready to receive consult Software Manual for information on the transmission procedure Using the Memory Card While displaying the driver information page press and the fol lowing mask will appear TRAN PAGE VT585WB TRANSFER PAGE Touch screen BOOT check OK Graphic controller BOOT check OK G...

Page 582: ...n see Page 27 21 and the following mask will appear For the meaning and the functions of the keys see Chapter 34 Memory card VT585WB TRANSFER PAGE Touch screen BOOT check OK Graphic controller BOOT check OK Graphic controller RAM check OK Main BOOT and RAM check WAIT SELECT MSP ASP EXIT MemoCARD MEMORY CARD MENU EXIT RESTORE ERASE BACKUP ...

Page 583: ...sed you quit the display of information regarding the driver Improving display color quality To improve the color quality adjust the contrast of the display if the colors are too dark increase the contrast if on the other hand the colors are too light decrease the contrast Adjusting the contrast on the display To improve the quality of the representation on the display it may be neces sary to adju...

Page 584: ......

Page 585: ...8 10 CAN series rear view 28 11 Ethernet series rear view 28 12 Dimensions and Cut out 28 13 Accessories 28 14 Calibration of Touch Screen 28 14 Termination of CAN line 28 17 Introducing the MAC address 28 18 Transfer PC VT 28 21 Preparation for reception 28 21 Information relating to driver 28 23 Improving display color quality 28 29 Adjusting the contrast on the display 28 29 This chapter consis...

Page 586: ...Display Type LCD Monochromatic STN LCD 256 Colors STN LCD 256 Colors TFT Touch screen cells Matrix 50x40 Cell 16x15 pixels Representational format Graphic Resolution pixels 800 x 600 12 1 Rows per character 40 x 100 20 x 50 10 x 25 Dimension of visible area mm 246 x 185 Character matrix in text mode pixels 8 x15 16 x 30 32 x 60 Character size mm x1 x2 x4 2 5 x 4 6 5 x 9 2 10 x 18 4 Contrast adjust...

Page 587: ...es Connectable accessories See table Chapter 34 Clock Clock Hardware withSupercapacitor Min 72hTypically130h Networks Integrated Profibus DP CAN Open Optoisolated interface Ethernet 10 100Mbit RJ45 Universal Bus Connector Optional See table Chapter 34 Proprietary networks ESA Net Network server Network client Technical data Power supply 24Vdc 18 32Vdc Power absorbed at 24Vdc 15W Protection fuse Ø5...

Page 588: ...ecipe from data memory Command Modify password Command Next page Command Page help Command Password login Command Password logout Command Previous page Command Print alarm history Command Printer form feed Command Quit project Command Report Command Restarts reading time sampled trend Command Run pipeline Command Save alarms history and trend buffers in flash Command Save recipe in data memory Com...

Page 589: ...ction Go to page Function Internal command Function Invert bit value Function Macro Function None Function Reset bit permanently Function Reset real time bit Function Sequences Function Sets bit permanently Function Sets real time bit Function Value structure direct command Global configuration of E keys Global configuration of F keys Headers and footers Total Number of fields per H F 128 128 Info...

Page 590: ... ESANET network Number Total bytes 1024 1024 Recipe field for recipe structure Recipes Number of variables per recipe 1024 512 Rectangles Redefinable characters Reports 128 Sequences Random Sequences Start stop Static bitmaps Symbolic field Bit group structured dynamic bitmaps 1024 Symbolic field Single bit structured dynamic bitmaps Symbolic field Value structured dynamic bitmaps System messages ...

Page 591: ...ariables Limit values and linear scaling variables 400 x pages Variables Movement variable Mobile symbolic field Variables Threshold variables Variables Floating Point numerical variables Variables Numerical variables DEC HEX BIN BCD Variables String variables ASCII Table 28 1 Functions and objects realizable with this VT Part 4 of 4 Code of terminal VT595W Objects Functions Quantity Unless otherw...

Page 592: ...CHAPTER 28 Video terminal VT595W 405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 28 8 Front view All buttons and signals are defined via the programming software see Soft ware Manual ...

Page 593: ...02 2008 28 9 Standard series rear view Position Function A Power supply connector B LPT port for connecting printer C MSP serial port for communicating with PLC PC D ASP serial port for communicating with PC or other devices A D C B ...

Page 594: ...200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 28 10 Profibus DP series rear view Position Function A Power supply connector B LPT port for connecting printer C MSP serial port for communicating with PLC PC D Serial port for network communication A D C B ...

Page 595: ...0 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 28 11 CAN series rear view Position Function A Power supply connector B LPT port for connecting printer C MSP serial port for communicating with PLC PC D CAN serial port A D C B ...

Page 596: ...008 28 12 Ethernet series rear view Position Function A Power supply connector B LPT port for connecting printer C MSP serial port for communicating with PLC PC D Ethernet network 10 100Mbit RJ45 For the diagnostic mode of the LEDs see Chapter 31 Ethernet port A D C B ...

Page 597: ...405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 28 13 Dimensions and Cut out ...

Page 598: ...in the relevant chapter see Chapter 34 Video terminal accessories Calibration of Touch Screen The screen of VT595W is made of resistive sensitive glass for this type of glass to work properly it requires a calibration procedure the terminal is already calibrated when supplied that is the resistive area of the glass has to be adjusted to the visible are of the display Should it be thought necessary...

Page 599: ... procedure Make sure the VT is not connected to the power supply Remove the back cover Identify jumper J11 Position J11 on pins 2 3 C Reconnect the power supply and switch on the terminal the following mask appears C J11 3 2 1 TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION Please touch bottom left ...

Page 600: ...he corner indicated in the figure then the following page appears on screen Touch the corner indicated in the figure to complete the Calibrazione procedure the following page now appears TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION Please touch top right TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION please touch bottom right ...

Page 601: ...n has be carried out wrongly or imprecisely repeat the procedure Termination of CAN line This paragraph applies only to the CAN series The VT in question inte grates the termination resistances of the serial line typically 120 ohms which can be inserted by means of a jumper preset on 1 2 line not termi nated To activate the termination Make sure the device is not connected to the power supply Remo...

Page 602: ...ctedintheEther net network The terminal is acquired with the address already programmed and is shown on the display of the terminal in the transfer page The MAC address is permanently memorized in the terminal but should it T J14 3 2 1 VT595W ETHERNET TRANSFER PAGE Touch screen BOOT check OK Graphic controller BOOT check OK Graphic controller RAM check OK Main BOOT and RAM check OK Graphic control...

Page 603: ...ro ceed as follows Check that the VT is not connected to the power supply Remove the back cover Locate the label carrying the MAC address Make a note of the number on the label e g 00 0E 0E 00 00 01 00 0E 0E fixed part that identifying as an ESA product xx xx xx variable part different for each terminal Reconnect the power supply to the terminal and if necessary calibrate the touch screen see Page...

Page 604: ...Once the address has been con firmed the following page is displayed The procedure is now terminated Should a wrong MAC address have been inserted contact the ESA Customer Care Department Enter a valid MAC address 00 0E 0E 00 00 00 VT595W ETHERNET TRANSFER PAGE SELECT MAC addr 00 0E 0E 00 00 01 MSP EXIT MemoCARD ...

Page 605: ...ll be defined as Project transfer for the sake of simplicity For this it is essential that the VT be prepared to receive the transfer See also Chapter 38 Command area Preparation for reception The programme VTWIN must be used for the transfer see Software Man ual but the terminal must be prepared for reception This means carrying out the following steps Check that the VT is off Check that there is...

Page 606: ...he Memory Card has been inserted in the VT see Page 28 27 VT595W TRANSFER PAGE Touch screen BOOT check OK Graphic controller BOOT check OK Graphic controller RAM check OK Main BOOT and RAM check OK Graphic controller synchronization OK Main FIRMWARE check NOT PRESENT Graphic controller FIRMWARE ERROR SELECT MSP ASP EXIT MemoCARD VT595W TRANSFER PAGE Touch screen BOOT check OK Graphic controller BO...

Page 607: ...e trans fer Information relating to driver After the project has been transferred the VT can make available informa tion relating to what has been loaded The information regards Serial ports present The name of the driver loaded The version of the driver loaded Network address of the VT Last error to have occurred To acquire this information carry out the following operations Be situated in any pa...

Page 608: ...le must be free and you will see There is one of these pages for each communication port movement between the various pages is effected by pressing PROG ESC Port xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Ver xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Addr VT xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Error xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Driver xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx TRAN PAGE ...

Page 609: ...he program Use the Memory Card Setting the clock and the contrast To set the clock and the contrast while displaying the above illus trated page press the following mask appears To set the contrast touch the words SET CONTRAST on the display you will see the following mask PROG ESC SET CONTRAST SET CLOCK ddd dd mm yy hh mm ss ...

Page 610: ...02 2008 28 26 Use the arrow for any variation see Chapter 37 Operation of terminal with touch screen To set the clock touch the words SET CLOCK on the display the following mask appears ESC CONTRAST SET CONTRAST SET CLOCK ddd dd mm yy hh mm ss hh mm ss dd mm yy ESC ...

Page 611: ... following mask The on screen to press depends on the port you intend to use MSP or ASP The VT terminal is now ready to receive consult Software Manual for information on the transmission procedure Using the Memory Card While displaying the driver information page press and the fol lowing mask will appear TRAN PAGE VT595W TRANSFER PAGE Touch screen BOOT check OK Graphic controller BOOT check OK Gr...

Page 612: ...n see Page 28 21 and the following mask will appear For the meaning and the functions of the keys see Chapter 34 Memory card VT595W TRANSFER PAGE Touch screen BOOT check OK Graphic controller BOOT check OK Graphic controller RAM check OK Main BOOT and RAM check WAIT SELECT MSP ASP EXIT MemoCARD MEMORY CARD MENU EXIT RESTORE ERASE BACKUP ...

Page 613: ...sed you quit the display of information regarding the driver Improving display color quality To improve the color quality adjust the contrast of the display if the colors are too dark increase the contrast if on the other hand the colors are too light decrease the contrast Adjusting the contrast on the display To improve the quality of the representation on the display it may be neces sary to adju...

Page 614: ......

Page 615: ...405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 29 1 Chapter 29 Inserting customized labels Contents Page Label 29 2 Warnings 29 2 Notes 29 4 This chapter consists of 4 pages ...

Page 616: ...bel must be of a material that is flexible and does not exceed 125µm micrometers Use neither stiff materials nor glues Warnings Before starting to insert the customized label the following points MUST BE observed Remove the label already inserted Follow the indications set out in the paragraph Label Do not use compressed air to help insert the label Do not use rigid or other instruments to insert ...

Page 617: ... illustrated generate pressure that over time could cause the keyboard to scollare The oversize part of the label must go under the back cover or in the appropriate fixing points the choice is determined by the type of VT being used Compromised adhesion Compromised adhesion Back cover Fixing points for adhesives ...

Page 618: ...ull the label out and reinsert it If more than one label is used insert them all at the same time Take care not to exceed the total thickness permitted see Page 29 2 Label Do not bend the label at right angles and or do not bend them so sharply that they might be damaged Slightly bend the label lengthwise to make it stiffer Label 1 Label 2 Index finger Thumb Middle finger Index finger Thumb Middle...

Page 619: ...1 of 25 02 2008 30 1 Chapter 30 Mounting the terminal within the container Contents Page Using nuts 30 2 Using hooks 30 3 Fixing using external support 30 6 Tightening the fixing screws 30 3 This chapter consists of 10 pages ...

Page 620: ...tallation phase and the means of securing are hooks and those with seal already attached which are fixed to the container using external support Using nuts The figure below shows the front and back views of a VT inserted in a con tainer Under the figure is to be found the sequence of operations to be car ried out to ensure that the fixing is correct After preparing the container that will host the...

Page 621: ... and rear views the sequence of actions for mounting a VT within a container After preparing the container that will host the VT Insert the gasket in the VT the right way round as indicated by the cen tering notches Centering and gripping notch Cut out of a container Video Terminal Gasket to be inserted ...

Page 622: ...4 Prepare the fixing hooks Thread the screws into the hook by about 10mm Insert the VT and hold it pressed against the container Insert the hooks into the slots following the direction indicated by the arrow and tighten the screws as far as they go see also Page 30 10 Fixing hook Screws for hooks ...

Page 623: ... 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 30 5 View of terminal with correct fixing The number and position of the hooks do not influence the fixing procedure The illustrations are to show the way the hooks work ...

Page 624: ... hook allows the terminal to be posi tioned at various heights and angles so the exact position must be defined To help do this the following figure shows the maximum movement possi ble from the operator s view point depending on how the tilt adjustment wedge is positioned intermediate positions for intermediate tilt angles Do not use or position other than as indicated Do not alter the original f...

Page 625: ...405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 30 7 Position Maximummovementpossiblerelativetooperator sviewinglevel 0 0 0 A 120mm 0 B 80mm 0 C 620mm 0 0 A B C 106mm ...

Page 626: ...screws for the type of material in ques tion After defining the position of the support hook Position the hook preferably on a smooth surface and secure using the screws supplied If a 3MA threaded hole is made just use the screws otherwise use the washer and nut The tilt adjustment wedge must be positioned position 0 A 0 B or inter mediate using the same criterion as with the previous point Fixing...

Page 627: ...405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 30 9 The VT can now be inserted following the direction of the arrows Fixing with screws washers and nuts Fixing with screws in 3MA threaded holes Final position ...

Page 628: ...er you are advised To respect the screwing sequenze illustrated Initially tighten the fixing screws with moderate pressure so as to ensure that contact is even at all points once all the screws have been inserted repeat the sequence with a final tightening 7 8 3 1 2 4 5 6 1 3 2 4 3 1 4 2 6 5 10 1 6 3 7 5 9 2 4 8 Using nuts Using hooks 1 6 4 2 5 3 1 4 2 3 3 1 4 2 10 1 6 7 5 9 2 4 8 3 ...

Page 629: ... 31 2 MSP serial port 31 3 ASP serial port 31 4 ASP 15L serial port 31 5 ASP 9 serial port 31 6 ASP 8 serial port 31 6 LPT parallel port 31 7 Ethernet port 31 8 Interbus S port 31 9 Profibus DP port 31 10 CAN port 31 10 RS485 serial port 31 11 PC VT serial port 31 11 PC VT connection 31 12 This chapter consists of 14 pages ...

Page 630: ...nnecting the communication cables so as to avoid possible damage to the VT and or the connected device Necessary steps To have the communication ports MSP ASP ASP 9 or ASP 8 function ing properly certain pins on the VT side need to be jump connected The ASP 15L port requires no jumpers Which pins need to be connected depends on which communication standard is to be used RS232 RS422 RS485 or C L TT...

Page 631: ...85 check the polarities With some devices the Tx Rx and Tx Rx signals or the polarities are inverted Pin Signal Notes 1 N C Not connected 2 Tx OUT RS232 3 Rx IN RS232 4 RTS OUT RS232 5 CTS IN RS232 6 N C Not connected 7 Signal GND Internal reference 0Volt 8 N C Not connected 9 Tx OUT C L TTY 20mA Current loop 10 Tx Rx IN OUT RS485 11 Tx OUT C L TTY 20mA Current loop 12 Tx OUT RS422 13 Rx IN RS422 ...

Page 632: ...o malfunction Strong input disturbances at Pin 13 could damage the VT Before connecting in RS422 485 check the polarities With some devices the Tx Rx and Tx Rx signals or the polarities are inverted Pin Signal Notes 1 DCD IN RS232 2 RX IN RS232 3 TX OUT RS232 4 DTR OUT RS232 5 Signal GND Internal reference 0Volt 6 N C Not connected 7 Signal GND Internal reference 0Volt 8 Tx Rx IN OUT RS485 9 DSR I...

Page 633: ...polarities With some devices the Tx Rx and Tx Rx signals or the polarities are inverted Pin Signal Notes 1 N C Not connected 2 RX IN RS232 3 TX OUT RS232 4 N C Not connected 5 Signal GND Internal reference 0Volt 6 N C Not connected 7 N C Not connected 8 Tx Rx IN OUT RS485 9 N C Not connected 10 N C Not connected 11 N C Not connected 12 N C Not connected 13 N C Not connected 14 N C Not connected 15...

Page 634: ... 8 does not provide for commuting any kind of load coils etc an input disturbance at Pin 8 can cause the VT and therefore also the industrial process itself to malfunction Pin Signal Notes 1 DCD IN 2 RX IN 3 TX OUT 4 DTR OUT 5 Signal GND Internal reference 0Volt 6 DSR IN 7 RTS OUT 8 CTS IN 9 RI IN ASP 9 Auxiliary Serial Port 9 pin male Pin Signal Notes 1 RX IN 2 TX OUT 3 N C Not connected 4 RTS OU...

Page 635: ...PRN Data 5 8 PRN Data 6 9 PRN Data 7 10 N C Not connected 11 PRN Busy 12 N C Not connected 13 N C Not connected 14 N C Not connected 15 N C Not connected 16 N C Not connected 17 N C Not connected 18 Signal GND Internal reference 0Volt 19 Signal GND Internal reference 0Volt 20 Signal GND Internal reference 0Volt 21 Signal GND Internal reference 0Volt 22 Signal GND Internal reference 0Volt 23 Signal...

Page 636: ...owing table gives the respective meanings Pin Signal Notes 1 TX 2 TX 3 RX 4 Reclosing with pin 5 and 75 ohm termination 5 Reclosing with pin 4 and 75 ohm termination 6 RX 7 Reclosing with pin 8 and 75 ohm termination 8 Reclosing with pin 7 and 75 ohm termination Led Meaning ACT LINK Off Off Cable disconnected interrupted or participants off Do not care On Network connection Yellow On Data exchange...

Page 637: ...self to malfunction Strong input disturbances at Pin 5 could damage the VT The NETWORK2 communication port consists of a 9 pin male D Sub con nector Pin Signal Notes 1 DO2 2 DI2 3 GND Internal reference 0Volt 4 N C Not connected 5 5V Reserved for Esa 6 DO2 7 DI2 8 N C Not connected 9 RBST Pin Signal Notes 1 DO1 2 DI1 3 GND Internal reference 0Volt 4 N C Not connected 5 N C Not connected 6 DO1 7 DI...

Page 638: ...ndustrial process itself to malfunction Strong input disturbances at Pin 6 could damage the VT CAN port The communication port consists of a 5 pin female terminal block optoiso lated interface Pin Signal Notes 1 Shield 2 N C Not connected 3 TxRx485 Data B 4 Repeater Control signal RTS 5 Signal GND Internal reference 0Volt 6 P5V Reserved for Esa 7 N C Not connected 8 TxRx485 Data A 9 N C Not connec...

Page 639: ...or VT in RS232 Pin Signal Notes 1 N C Not connected 2 N C Not connected 3 Tx Rx IN OUT RS485 4 N C Not connected 5 Signal GND Internal reference 0Volt 6 N C Not connected 7 N C Not connected 8 Tx Rx IN OUT RS485 9 N C Not connected 9 pin male Pin Signal Notes 1 N C Not connected 2 RX IN 3 TX OUT 4 DTR OUT 5 Signal GND Internal reference 0Volt 6 N C Not connected 7 RTS OUT 8 N C Not connected 9 N C...

Page 640: ...ation driver and the project the VT must be connected to the PC see Software Manual and can be done using either Serial or Modem The cable required to make the connection is illustrated below RS232 Modem 3 2 5 7 8 6 4 TxD RxD GND RTS CTS DSR DTR 3 2 7 4 5 15 18 25 RxD TxD GND RTS CTS PC side 9 pin female VT side 25 pin male Max 15 m CVCOM11102 ...

Page 641: ...ll serial port connections of the VT Below we list the adapters and the combinations necessary for the various connections CVCOM25F9M CVAD259 PC side 25 to 9 pins CVAD2515 CVAD259 CVCOM25F9M CVAD25M9M CVAD25M9M CVCOM25F8M CVCOM25F8M VT side 25 to 9 pins MODEM side 25 to 9 pins VT side 25 to 15 pins CVAD2515 VT side 25 to 8 pins ...

Page 642: ...ports Table 31 2 Combination of serial transfer adapters Serial Cable Adaptor MODEM PC VT CVCOM 11102 CVCOM 25M9M CVCOM 25F9M CVCOM 25F8M CVAD 259 CVAD 2515 9 pins MSP 9 pins ASP 9 pins ASP 15L 9 pins ASP 9 9 pins ASP 8 25 pins MSP 25 pins ASP 25 pins ASP 15L 25 pins ASP 9 25 pins ASP 8 25 pins MSP 25 pins ASP 25 pins ASP 15L 25 pins ASP 9 25 pins ASP 8 ...

Page 643: ...405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 32 1 Chapter 32 Settings for the Modem Contents Page AT commands to be sent 32 2 Sending commands 32 3 This chapter consists of 6 pages ...

Page 644: ...m as the VTs require The com mand also comprises the parameter required Should the commands not be accepted by the modem being used for the transfer consult the producer s manual for a complete list of valid commands Telephone line Table 32 1 AT commands Command Effect AT D0 The modem ignores the DTR signal and considers it always activated AT H0 or AT K0 Disables the RTS CTS flow check AT R1 The ...

Page 645: ...serial cable Once the connection and access are established the modem runs the Hyper Terminal program supplied with the PC s operating system by clicking on Start Programs Accessories Communications HyperTerminal RS232 Insert the name to be given to the connection Click on the OK Set the COM where the Modem is connected e g COM1 Click on the OK ...

Page 646: ... 2 21 of 25 02 2008 32 4 The main mask appears Set as in fig Click on the OK Check that there is a connection between PC and Modem Digit the ATH command and confirm with the Enter key of the PC If the message OK appears it means the connection is active ...

Page 647: ... need to be kept the settings can be saved using the appropriate command The modem is ready to be connected to the VT Using the same criterion digit all the commands necessary for setting the modem see Page 32 2 AT commands to be sent If required you can digit AT W0 and confirm using the PC s Enter key ...

Page 648: ......

Page 649: ...es terminals Contents Page Standard series connection cable 33 2 Standard series connections without VTHCB 33 3 Standard series connections with VTHCB 33 6 CAN series connection cable 33 7 CAN series connections 33 7 Lay out of button functions 33 8 This chapter consists of 10 pages ...

Page 650: ...the ESA standard MSP ASP 15L allowing to use standard connection cables see Chapter 41 Connection cables To see what button does what see Page 33 8 Cable from VT Signals Command and or sig nal unit Yellow Green Power supply Red 24VDC Black 0VDC Pink TX RS232 OUT MSP Serial communication line White RX RS232 IN MSP Blue RTS RS232 OUT MSP Green CTS RS232 IN MSP Yellow Signal GND White Grey TX RX RS48...

Page 651: ...e to perform the connections of the only serial you intend to use The serial line used directly on the cable DOES NOT allow the use of ESA standard connection cables see Chapter 41 Connection cables RS232 without RTS CTS management TX RS232 OUT MSP RX RS232 IN MSP RTS RS232 OUT MSP CTS RS232 IN MSP Signal GND TX RX RS485 IN OUT MSP TX RX RS485 IN OUT MSP TX RS232 OUT ASP RX RS232 IN ASP RX RS232 T...

Page 652: ...2 connection with RTS CTS management TX RS232 OUT MSP RX RS232 IN MSP RTS RS232 OUT MSP CTS RS232 IN MSP Signal GND TX RX RS485 IN OUT MSP TX RX RS485 IN OUT MSP TX RS232 OUT ASP RX RS232 IN ASP RX RS232 TX RS232 RTS Signal GND RX RS232 TX RS232 SHD CTS COM 1 Signal GND SHD COM 2 VT Side DEVICE Side ...

Page 653: ...en the VT is inserted as the first or the last component in a network see also Chap ter 35 Network connection TX RS232 OUT MSP RX RS232 IN MSP RTS RS232 OUT MSP CTS RS232 IN MSP Signal GND TX RX RS485 IN OUT MSP TX RX RS485 IN OUT MSP TX RS232 OUT ASP RX RS232 IN ASP RX RS232 TX RS232 COM 1 Signal GND SHD COM 2 Signal GND TX RX RS485 TX RX RS485 SHD VT Side DEVICE Side ...

Page 654: ...M11102 cable for the transfer see also Chapter 31 PC VT connection Standard series connections with VTHCB For the connection of board VTHCB please refer to its respective chapter see Chapter 34 Video terminal accessories TX RS232 OUT MSP RX RS232 IN MSP RTS RS232 OUT MSP CTS RS232 IN MSP Signal GND TX RX RS485 IN OUT MSP TX RX RS485 IN OUT MSP TX RS232 OUT ASP RX RS232 IN ASP TxD RxD GND 2 3 7 GND...

Page 655: ...st be carried out directly on the cable For the connection diagram see Chapter 35 CAN Connection Cable from VT Signals Command and or sig nal unit Yellow Green Power supply Red 24VDC Black 0VDC Pink TX RS232 OUT Serial communication line White RX RS232 IN Yellow Signal GND Blue CAN CAN communication line Green V White Grey Shield Yellow White CAN White Black NC1 System shut down but ton Brown Pink...

Page 656: ...Chapter 31 PC VT connection Lay out of button functions System shut down button Enabling button The system shut down button and the enabling button do NOT guarantee the operatr s complete personal safety Be sure to TX RS232 OUT MSP RX RS232 IN MSP Signal GND TxD RxD GND 2 3 7 VT Side 25 pin female NC3 NC4 NC1 NC2 NC1 NC2 NC3 NC4 Pushing button NC1 C1 NO2 C2 NO2 C2 NC1 C1 NO2 C2 NC1 C1 NC1 C1 NO2 C...

Page 657: ...405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 33 9 design your system so that is ensures the operator s complete personal safety ...

Page 658: ......

Page 659: ...onnecting Hand Held with MSP ASP 15L 34 9 Memory card 34 13 Memory module 34 18 Integrated Interbus S module 34 19 Integrated Profibus DP module 34 21 Protfilm4 6 6H 10 12 34 22 RS485 Serial module 34 21 Interbus S and Profibus DP card 34 27 Connection card for PC NET 34 34 Adapter for external CAN network 34 37 20 key serial keyboard 34 42 Blank keyboard 34 46 This chapter consists of 50 pages ...

Page 660: ...2 D VT575W2 VT580W2 VT585W2 D VT585WB2 VT595W2 Fixing hook for Hand Held VT505H VT525H Interface for connecting Hand Held with MSP ASP 15L VT505H VT525H Memory Card 4 Mbytes VT300W2 VT310W2 VT320W2 VT330W3 B VT56xW2 A VT585W3 B Memory Card 8 Mbytes VT330W2 B VT575W2 VT580W2 VT585W2 B VT585WB2 VT595W2 Memory module 512Kbytes VT170W1 VT190W1 Integrated Interbus S module VT170W VT190W Integrated Prof...

Page 661: ...5 VT505W5 VT515W5 VT525W5 VT555W5 VT56xW VT575W VT580W VT585W VT585WB VT595W Adapter for external CAN network VT505 VT60 VT130W5 VT150W5 VT160W VT170W VT190W VT300W4 5 VT310W4 VT320W4 VT330W4 VT155W5 VT185W5 VT505W5 VT515W5 VT525W5 VT555W5 VT56xW VT575W VT580W VT585W4 VT585WB VT595W Blank keyboard VT150W VT300W VT310W VT320W Serial keyboard with 20 keys LEDs VT150W VT300W VT310W VT320W Table 34 1 ...

Page 662: ...r 24 hours Discarded batteries should be placed in appropriate containers Procedure for inserting or substituting the battery Check that the power supply is not connected Take off the hatch covering the battery compartment of the VT see Chapter 8 Rear view and or Chapter 9 Rear view Pull off the black plastic safety cover that snaps over the battery com partment Insert the new battery checking tha...

Page 663: ... RAM memory information information is typically retained for 24 hours Discarded batteries should be placed in appropriate containers Procedure for inserting or substituting the battery Check that the power supply is not connected Take off the hatch covering the battery compartment of the VT Insert the new battery checking that the polarities are correct Replace the hatch covering the battery comp...

Page 664: ... of 25 02 2008 34 6 The position and direction on the printed circuit board may be different depending on which VT model is used Insert the spacers A in the holes B taking care which way round they are put then insert the flash module into the terminal ESA A B B ...

Page 665: ...wer supply Procedure for removing the flash module Check that the VT power supply is disconnected Remove the back cover Locate the following element To extract the connector A pull lightly then pull on the corners one by one and at the same time press down on tyhe head of the spacer B ESA ESA A B B A B ...

Page 666: ...r information regarding the operation of the card see Page 34 16 Using the Memory Card Fixing hook for Hand Held This is an accessory for fixing VTs that can t be embedded Do not alter the original form of the mounting hook or the tilt adjustment wedge Fixing the device Various ways of fixing the device are possible For details see Chapter 30 Fixing using external support ...

Page 667: ... connector for details see Chapter 31 ASP 15L serial port The ASP 15L port does not work when connected to a VT505H and is limited to RS232 when connected to a VT525H See Chapter 2 Power Supply for connecting the power supply Connector block Number of connection points X1 X2 30 14 Section of connectable wire 0 05 1 5 mmq 30 16AWG Stripped length of connectable wire 5 6 mm Technical data Power supp...

Page 668: ...CHAPTER 34 Video terminal accessories 405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 34 10 Dimensions HCB ...

Page 669: ...N rail mounting plate Hook the upper part of the plate onto the DIN rail Press the device in the direction indicated Arrow A To make it easier to hook on pull the spring clip in the direction indi cated Arrow B A B DIN EN 50022 DIN EN 50035 DIN EN 50045 A B A B ...

Page 670: ... Connector block X1 Connector block X2 Internal switchboard Other signals relating to opera tion of board Yellow Green 19 See electrical lay out for end user Red 1 Black 16 Pink 13 White 28 Blue 29 Green 30 Yellow 17 White Grey 14 Yellow White 15 VT525H only Blue Brown 5 White Red 20 System shut down button NC1 White Black 6 7 NC2 Brown Pink 21 14 NC3 White Blue 22 13 NC4 Brown Grey 7 6 Enabling b...

Page 671: ...evice in which you can store the information con tained in the VT terminal The Memory Card Flash EPROM type can be used as a backup for the project and firmware to load one or more terminals without using a PC to send the end user updates without VTWIN VTHCB F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F9 F10 F8 F7 F6 Internal swirtchboard circuit ...

Page 672: ...aracteristics of the prod uct in question Inserting the memory card into the VT Procedure for inserting the card Check that the VT is not connected to the power supply Remove the back cover Locate the following element Insert the memory card in its housing checking that it is the right way round Technical data Memory 4Mb or 8Mb Contacts for electrical con nection Rear View Front view To insert fol...

Page 673: ...ver of the VT Reconnect the VT to the power supply Procedure for removing the memory card Check that the VT power supply is disconnected Remove the back cover Locate the following element Press lightly on the fixing tab of the memory card see figure below in the direction of the arrow Once the memory card is unhooked see figure remove it following the direction of the arrow ...

Page 674: ... contents of the menus and their meaning depend on the type of terminal being used The functions listed below do NOT require confirmation press the key and the function will be executed also in the case of Erase The following are the functions available with VT300W VT310W VT320W VT56xW VT585W Erase Restore Backup Exit Erase Makes it possible to erase the Memory Card completely with permanent loss ...

Page 675: ...s data all its contents being definitively lost and then to transfer to it all the data contained in VT memory Backup FW PRJ Thisfunctionallowsyoutocleartherelevantsectionofthemem orycardofitsdata allitscontentsbeingdefinitivelylost andthen to transfer to it the project Start up language and Password included and the firmware contained in VT memory Backup RECIPES This function allows you to clear ...

Page 676: ... recipes contained in the memory card into the VT Restore ALARMS This function allows you to transfer the alarm buffers con tained in the memory card into the VT Exit Makes it possible to quit the menu page and return to the pre vious page Memory module This is a removable device capable of saving the VT s firmware and its project Although the device is removable there must be a Memory mod ule in ...

Page 677: ... you to connect a number of ter minals in an Interbus S network For more details concerning the network connection of the terminals see Chapter 35 Network connection The NETWORK1 communication port consists of a 9 pin female D Sub connector see Chapter 31 Interbus S port The NETWORK2 communication port consists of a 9 pin male D Sub con nector see Chapter 31 Interbus S port Inserting the module in...

Page 678: ...e spacers A into the holes B checking the they are the right way round now insert the module into the terminal Set the network address using the appropriate Dip Switch not present on this module Replace the back cover Reconnect the power supply of the VT D SUB NETWORK1 D SUB NETWORK2 A A B B ...

Page 679: ...ter 35 Network connection The NETWORK1 communication port consists of a 9 pin female D Sub connector see Chapter 31 Profibus DP port See Page 34 19 for how to insert the module in the VT RS485 Serial module The integrated module shown above allows many terminals to be connected in an ESA Net network For further details regarding the connection of ter minals in the network see Chapter 35 Network co...

Page 680: ...is is a transparent protective film to be applied to the front of the touch screen terminal to protect it from wear on the part of external agents see Chapter 42 Resistance to chemical substances 201 0 139 0 160 0 94 0 201 0 149 0 250 0 187 0 206 0 279 0 PROTFILM4 PROTFILM10 PROTFILM6 PROTFILM12 PROTFILM6H ...

Page 681: ...of 25 02 2008 34 23 Applying the film How to apply the adhesive film Remove any trace of dirt or grease from the terminal using denaturized ethyl alcohol Dry the area thoroughly Locate the adhesive part of the transparent film ...

Page 682: ...ssories 405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 34 24 Position the film near the upper edge and smooth it down delicately F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F9 F10 F8 F7 F6 VT155 185W VT505 515 525 555 56xW VT575W VT580W VT595W VT585W VT585WB VT505 525H ...

Page 683: ...00 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 34 25 Pass a soft cloth firmly over the edges to ensure adhesion F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F9 F10 F8 F7 F6 VT155 185W VT505 515 525 555 56xW VT575W VT580W VT595W VT585W VT585WB VT505 525H ...

Page 684: ...es 405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 34 26 How to remove the adhesive film To remove the film pull upwards using the tab F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F9 F10 F8 F7 F6 VT155 185W VT505 515 525 555 56xW VT575W VT580W VT595W VT585W VT585WB VT505 525H ...

Page 685: ... Interbus S and Profibus DP network cards see Page 34 19 and Page 34 21 for information it also contains a power sup ply card with a communication port composed of a 9 pin male D Sub con nector for connecting a PC or VT in RS232 see Chapter 31 PC VT serial port Technical data Power supply 24Vdc 18 32Vdc Power absorbed at 24Vdc 3W Protection level Operating temperature 0 50 C Storage and transporta...

Page 686: ...power supply for this card can also come via a 4 pin connector or a jack See Chapter 2 Power Supply for connecting the power supply The connection to the VT uses the following cables 3 2 5 TxD RxD GND 3 2 7 4 5 15 18 25 RxD TxD GND RTS CTS DEVICE Side 9 pin female VT Side MSP 25 pin male Max 15 m ...

Page 687: ... 02 2008 34 29 3 2 5 TxD RxD GND 2 3 5 7 8 RxD TxD GND RTS CTS DEVICE Side 9 pin female VT Side ASP 9 9 pin female Max 15 m 3 2 5 TxD RxD GND 2 3 7 10 11 RxD TxD GND RTS CTS DEVICE Side 9 pin female VT Side ASP 15 pin male Max 15 m ...

Page 688: ... The connection to the PC uses the following cables 3 2 5 TxD RxD GND 2 3 5 RxD TxD GND 7 8 RTS CTS 6 4 DSR DTR DEVICE Side 9 pin female PC Side 9 pin female Max 15 m 3 2 5 TxD RxD GND 3 2 5 RxD TxD GND 7 8 RTS CTS 6 20 DSR DTR DEVICE Side 9 pin female PC Side 25 pin female Max 15 m ...

Page 689: ...405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 34 31 Dimensions ...

Page 690: ...l molded plate for attaching to the DIN rail The following figure shows how to fit the plate to the device Locate the two fixing holes Position the device such that the holes are decentered towards the top Secure the mounting plate with the screws supplied keeping the spring clip down Attaching the device to the DIN rail Spring clip Holes not central A B ...

Page 691: ...cated Arrow A To make it easier to hook on pull the spring clip in the direction indi cated Arrow B Fixing the device to the back cover Check that the VT power supply is not connected Remove the back cover Attach the device as illustrated above using the appropriate screws sup plied and making sure the direction is correct Replace the back cover Reconnect the VT power supply ...

Page 692: ...r is equipped with a D Sub 25 pin female MSP connector for details see Chapter 31 MSP serial port and a D Sub 9 pin male PC VT connector for details see Page 34 27 The external power supply for this card can also come via a 4 pin connector or a jack See Chapter 2 Power Supply for connecting the power supply Technical data Power supply 24Vdc 18 32Vdc Power absorbed at 24Vdc 3W Protection level Oper...

Page 693: ...the PC uses the following cables 3 2 5 TxD RxD GND 2 3 5 RxD TxD GND 7 8 RTS CTS 6 4 DSR DTR DEVICE Side 9 pin female PC Side 9 pin female Max 15 m 3 2 5 TxD RxD GND 3 2 5 RxD TxD GND 7 8 RTS CTS 6 20 DSR DTR DEVICE Side 9 pin female PC Side 25 pin female Max 15 m ...

Page 694: ...CHAPTER 34 Video terminal accessories 405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 34 36 Dimensions ...

Page 695: ... see Chapter35 Networkconnection TheadapterisequippedwithaMinidin 8pinfemaleASP 8connector fordetailssee Chapter31 ASP 8serialport and a disconnectable 5 pin female terminal block for connecting the CAN net work optoisolated interface see Chapter 31 CAN port See Chapter 2 Power Supply for connecting the power supply The connection to the VT uses the following cables Technical data Power supply 24V...

Page 696: ... accessories 405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 34 38 Dimensions 7 6 8 5 4 3 2 1 3 2 7 4 5 15 18 25 RxD TxD GND RTS CTS 2 1 7 4 5 TxD RxD GND RTS CTS DEVICE Side 8 pin male VT Side MSP 25 pin male Max 15 m MiniDin Front View ...

Page 697: ...al line typically 120 ohms which can be inserted by means of a jumper pre set on 1 2 line not terminated To activate the termination Make sure the device is not connected to the power supply Remove the cover Identify the jumper unit J2 Position the jumper between pins 2 and 3 line terminated Replace the back cover Reconnect the power supply ...

Page 698: ...l molded plate for attaching to the DIN rail The following figure shows how to fit the plate to the device Locate the two fixing holes Position the device such that the holes are decentered towards the top Secure the mounting plate with the screws supplied keeping the spring clip down Attaching the device to the DIN rail Spring clip Holes not central A B ...

Page 699: ...cated Arrow A To make it easier to hook on pull the spring clip in the direction indi cated Arrow B Fixing the device to the back cover Check that the VT power supply is not connected Remove the back cover Attach the device as illustrated above using the appropriate screws sup plied and making sure the direction is correct Replace the back cover Reconnect the VT power supply ...

Page 700: ...al technical characteristics of the prod uct in question Keyboard Non customizable function keys Customizable function keys 20 Function key LEDs 20 Alphanumeric keys Operational keys Operational key LEDs Diagnostic LEDs Technical data Power supply Power absorbed at 24Vdc Protection level IP65 front end Operating temperature 0 50 C Storage and transportation temperature 20 60 C Humidity non condens...

Page 701: ...405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 34 43 Front view Rear view Key Function 1 Labels for customizing F keys 2 F keys 1 2 A ...

Page 702: ...CHAPTER 34 Video terminal accessories 405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 34 44 Dimensions and Cut out Position Function A Point for connecting to VT by means of a shielded flat cable Max length 300mm ...

Page 703: ... directly to the auxiliary port see Chapter 6 Standard series rear view of VT150W by means of a shielded flat cable no external power being necessary The maximum length of the cable is 300 mm The explanation of the connection method applies to all terminals with this accessory See Page 34 2 Care must be exercised in making these connections using the accessories provided and following the wiring i...

Page 704: ...onnector on the cover by pressing in the metal plate and remove it see Chapter 6 Standard series rear view point B Replace the back cover of the VT Insert the cable connector into the VT see Chapter 6 Standard series rear view point B Secure the cable to the VT by means of the collar and screws provided It is essential that the metal collar pressing on the shield of the connecting cable make direc...

Page 705: ... has no keys This accessory allows the user to fit and wire buttons Any kind of key pad can be used Technical data Power supply Power absorbed at 24Vdc Protection level IP65 front end Operating temperature 0 50 C Storage and transportation temperature 20 60 C Humidity non condensing 85 Weight 100gr Dimensions External W x H x D mm 148 x188 Cut out W x H mm 114 x 174 ...

Page 706: ...CHAPTER 34 Video terminal accessories 405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 34 48 Dimensions and Cut out ...

Page 707: ...405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 34 49 To fix the sealing gasket and secure the VT to the container see Chapter 30 Mounting the terminal within the container ...

Page 708: ......

Page 709: ...Standard Logical diagram 35 7 Profibus DP Standard Physical diagram 35 7 Profibus DP Connection 35 8 Interbus S 35 10 Interbus S VT operation 35 10 Interbus S Configuration software 35 10 Interbus S Logical diagram 35 11 Interbus S Physical diagram 35 12 Interbus S Connection 35 12 ESA Net 35 14 ESA Net VT operation 35 14 ESA Net Connecting the terminals 35 16 ESA Net Configuration software 35 20 ...

Page 710: ...R 35 Network connection 405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 35 2 CAN VT functioning in CAN network 35 24 CAN Configuration software 35 25 CAN Connection 35 25 Contents Page This chapter consists of 28 pages ...

Page 711: ... with ESA Profile the I O area is 32bytes 32bytes and is handled by a FB Function Block not available on all devices that has the task of allowing the VT read and write access to all the data areas of the device the Standard profile can use an I O area of up to 128bytes 128bytes corresponding to the maximum data area dimensions visible to the VT A network can contain more than one master and more ...

Page 712: ...t in configuring the network VTWIN FB File with extension GSD Configuration software for network master These types of software require parameters that coincide VTWIN The parameters that must be set in the VTWIN project of every ter minal connected in the network are Size in words of the I O area Timeout for testing the connection between the VT and PLC Address of terminal FB This is a program sup...

Page 713: ... the data exchange between the PLC memory and the VTs and viceversa The number of FB calls within the PLC must be equal to the number of VTs connected in the system PARAMETRIZED FB INIT ESA HMI PROFILE Supplied by ESA elettronica PARAMETRIZED FB DRIVER ESA HMI PROFILE Supplied by ESA elettronica OUTPUT INPUT LENGTH 8 32 BYTES INPUT LENGTH 8 32 BYTES OUTPUT VT n PROFIBUS DP INTEGRATED MODULE OR PRO...

Page 714: ... 128byte Profibus DP Standard Configuration software There are 3 types of software that play a part in configuring the network VTWIN File with extension GSD Configuration software for network master These types of software require parameters that coincide VTWIN The parameters that must be set in the VTWIN project of every ter minal connected in the network are Size in words of the I O area Timeout...

Page 715: ...ow is a physical diagram of the VT Profibus DP connections PLC DATA MEMORY MASTER in PROFIBUS DP PLC BUS VT OUTPUT INPUT LENGTH 8 128 BYTES INPUT LENGTH 8 128 BYTES OUTPUT VT 1 PROFIBUS DP INTEGRATED MODULE OR PROFIBUS DP MODULE I O LENGTH 8 128 BYTES GSD File GSD File OUTPUT INPUT LENGTH 8 128 BYTES INPUT LENGTH 8 128 BYTES OUTPUT VT n PROFIBUS DP INTEGRATED MODULE OR PROFIBUS DP MODULE I O LENGT...

Page 716: ... of connection existing within the connec tors Use the materials listed in the table below when making connection cables Table 35 3 Cables Maker Distributor Type Web Belden 3079A PROFIBUS Cable www belden com Siemens Simatic Net Profibus FC6X91 830 0E11 10 www siemens com Intercond 1DR 22X 02R www intercond com 1DR 22X 02P For further details contact the retailer and orvisit the appropriate WEB si...

Page 717: ... Type Web Siemens 6ES7972 0BA10 0XA0 www siemens com 6ES7972 0BB10 0XA0 6ES7972 0BA40 0XA0 6ES7972 0BB40 0XA0 6GK1500 0EA00 Erni 103 648 www erni com 103 658 103 663 103 649 103 659 104 329 104 577 104 322 For further details contact the retailer and orvisit the appropriate WEB site ...

Page 718: ... in the network is 4 words 8byte Interbus S Configuration software There are 3 types of software that play a part in configuring the network VTWIN FB Configuration software for network master These types of software require parameters that coincide VTWIN The parameters that must be set in the VTWIN project of every ter minal connected in the network are Timeout for testing the connection between t...

Page 719: ...e equal to the number of VTs connected in the system PARAMETRIZED FB INIT ESA HMI PROFILE Supplied by ESA elettronica PARAMETRIZED FB DRIVER ESA HMI PROFILE Supplied by ESA elettronica OUTPUT INPUT LENGTH 8 BYTES INPUT LENGTH 8 BYTES OUTPUT VT n INTERBUS INTEGRATED MODULE OR INTERBUS MODULE I O LENGTH 8 BYTES PLC DATA MEMORY LOCAL DATA for FB MASTER in INTERBUS SINGLE CALL ONLY AT STATR UP CYCLICA...

Page 720: ... terminals that can be con nected in the network which depends on the size of the memory available in the master device for the input and output of process data Each VT con nected occupies 64 bits for the data input area and 64 bits for the process data output thus Below we list the connection cables required Interbus S Master ESA Module Interbus S VT170W and VT190W with inte grated Interbus S mod...

Page 721: ...etails contact the retailer and orvisit the appropriate WEB site Table 35 6 Connectors Maker Distributor Type Web Phoenix 27 58 47 3 www phoenixcontact com 27 58 48 6 Erni 103 650 www erni com 103 651 103 660 103 661 104 319 For further details contact the retailer and orvisit the appropriate WEB site DO2 DI2 GND DI2 DO2 DO1 DO1 6 7 1 2 3 DI1 DI1 GND 6 1 7 2 3 5 9 5V RBST green pink yellow grey br...

Page 722: ...et VT operation To help clarify the concept of ESA Net we offer the data flow diagram below showing how a terminal assumes the function of client server and server client In the ESA Net network the server terminal is the one that makes all or some of the variables available to the other terminals these variables are called Public Variables The maximum length of public objects is 60 Bytes excess le...

Page 723: ...d by a continuous red line indicates the VT s response to a request the dotted lined traced in blue indicates the request for information A network can have more than one server more than one client and more than one server clients the total being 32 terminals The network participants must each have a different address the address of the terminal is configured using the VTWIN see Software Manual A...

Page 724: ...dered or mechanically connected to the metal shells of the connectors that are connected subsequently to the VTs in the network The VT serial connection cables must be laid in separate raceways from the power supply cables The VT serial connection cables must be laid in separate raceways from the power cables and from all the devices that may in gen eral be sources of disturbance servo drives inve...

Page 725: ... GND TxRx TxRx VCC MSP Connection type A 25 pin connector with polari zation and termination resi stances 18 15 7 25 22 10 120 Ω 1 4 W 7 4 5 RTS CTS GND TxRx TxRx MSP Connection type B 25 pin connector with termi nation resistances MSP Connection type C 25 pin connector 18 15 7 25 22 10 7 4 5 RTS CTS GND TxRx TxRx ...

Page 726: ... with polari zation and termination resi stances ASP Connection type E 15 pin connector with termi nation resistances 8 15 120 Ω 1 4 W 10 11 RTS CTS TxRx TxRx ASP Connection type F 15 pin connector 8 15 10 11 RTS CTS TxRx TxRx Field network Connec tion type G 9 pin connector with termi nation resistances TxRx TxRx 3 8 120 Ω 1 4 W Field network Connec tion type H 9 pin connector TxRx TxRx 3 8 ...

Page 727: ...e network will be first and which last If for any reason the extremes are connected by a Field network connector one of the intermediate VT connections must still be type A or D depending on which connector is available The following page shows the cable needed for the connection as in the fig ure using 3 VT terminals Table 35 7 Construction of ESA NET cable Connector Position Wiring A B C D E F G...

Page 728: ...heother VTWIN The parameters that need to be set in the VTWIN project of each ter minal connected in the network are Terminal s network address 16 18 470 Ω 1 4 W 15 4 5 RTS CTS 7 25 GND TxRx 22 10 TxRx 220 Ω 1 4 W 470 Ω 1 4 W 8 15 TxRx TxRx 10 11 RTS CTS 120 Ω 1 4 W 3 8 TxRx TxRx VT1 connection using 25 pin MSP VT2 connection using 15 pin ASP Connection using 9 pin RS485 serial module For this opt...

Page 729: ...mmunication protocol This splits up the informa tion and recomposes it once it arrives at its destination and it is responsible for checking that all the information has arrived at the destination The IP protocol on the other hand is responsible for directing the information sent to the right addressee These protocols TCP and IP always work closely together to ensure that the exchange of informati...

Page 730: ... be used for direct connection between the VT and the device without using a company network connection NOTE In this example we are not in a network context with other devices so the IP address can be arbitrary The first three numbers of the IP address assigned must be the same as those of the device with which it is to be connected the fourth number must be different Example VT 192 168 100 1 Devi...

Page 731: ... is possible to check that the system is working properly by running the command PING on a PC in the network Go to the prompt of the PC commands and type ping followed by the IP address assigned to the VT and or the device and confirm with Enter E g ping 192 168 100 5 If the connection and the settings have been executed correctly response strings will appear that contain the IP address requested ...

Page 732: ...ces must be initialized operational state and parameterized by the master device The VT can work at a speed ranging from 10kbit s to 1000kbit s CAN VT functioning in CAN network The VTs communicate with the devices using logical channels to which there correspond virtual communication lines which are independent of one another and definible using certain parameters Logical channels can be of one o...

Page 733: ...y terminal connected in the network are Network address of the terminal SDO PDO CAN Connection The figure below shows the connection of VT with devices in a CAN net work in a master VT and slave formation Theoretically the network admits 128 devices but the real limit depends on how many logical channels are activated The maximum number of chan nels is 64 SDO and 64 PDO Slave Master Address 1 A B ...

Page 734: ... ends of the line A are different from the internal ones B Indeed the A connectors require cabling with a termination resistance for the line The VT terminals are already internally equipped with a termination resis tance so in the first case VT master the resistance on the connector can be omitted by using an integrated resistance See chapter on terminal to be connected VTxxxH terminal cables alw...

Page 735: ...ion applies only to VTxxxH terminals The connection cable is already terminated on the VT side Shield V CAN CAN CAN Shield CAN V Connection type B Connection type A White Grey Yellow White Blue Green White Grey Yellow White Blue Green White Grey Yellow White Blue Green ...

Page 736: ......

Page 737: ...messages 36 11 VT150W VT160W info messages 36 12 VT170W info messages 36 12 VT190W info messages 36 13 VT300W VT310W VT320W info messages 36 14 VT330W info messages 36 14 ISA 1A alarms 36 18 VT130W alarms 36 19 VT170W alarms 36 20 VT190W alarms 36 22 VT300W VT310W VT320W alarms 36 23 VT330W alarms 36 23 ISA 1A alarm history buffer 36 27 VT130W history buffer 36 28 VT170W history buffer 36 29 VT190...

Page 738: ...CHAPTER 36 Operation of terminal with keyboard 405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 36 2 Help messages 36 32 Contents Page This chapter consists of 34 pages ...

Page 739: ...e equivalent screen area in pixels should be considered see Software Manual Chapter 6 Project language Changing value of variable field To be able to carry out a change in any editable variable field the cursor must first be positioned over the field involved by using and then pressing which enables the introduction of the new value The edit mode can be quit in two ways either by saving after comp...

Page 740: ...quentially the cursor moves one character to the right Partial change With the edit mode enabled pressing and then inputting a digit or character or pressing enables the change of only that digit or character pointed to by the cursor to change the adjacent digits or characters the cursor must be positioned manually the figure above applies only to VT50 and VT60 Examples of varying fields The examp...

Page 741: ...Sample page Field 1 0001 1 Press to enter the first digit of the new value the field assumes the value 1 1 D E F Sample page Field 1 1234 4 Press to complete the new value press to attribute a sign and to confirm the change 2 G H I 3 J K L 4 M N O Space Enter Sample page Field 2 10 3256 6 Edit mode is enabled and the cur sor flashes on the rightmost digit of the data least significant digit Sample...

Page 742: ...artial change of field 3 from B23C to BABA Sample page Field 2 0321 65 5 Press to complete the introduction of the new value Press to confirm the change 6 S T U 5 P Q R Enter Sample page Field 3 1A3F F Edit mode is enabled and the cur sor flashes on the rightmost digit of the data least significant digit Sample page Field 3 000B B Press three times to enter the first digit of the new value the fie...

Page 743: ...to change the digit to the value B 0 A B C B Sample page field 3 BABA A Position the cursor on the last digit by pressing press twice to change the digit to the value A Press to confirm the change 0 A B C Enter Sample page Field 4 MOTOR 1 M Edit mode is enabled and the cur sor flashes on the leftmost digit Sample page Field 4 VOTOR 1 V Press once to enter the first character of the new value 7 V W...

Page 744: ...wice to complete word VALVE 3 J K L 7 V W X 1 D E F Sample page Field 4 VALVE 3 3 Press to leave a space in the field and then 4 times Space 3 J K L Sample page Field 4 VALVE 3 5 5 Press to enter the char acter press 4 times to com plete the new value press to confirm the change shift Space 5 P Q R Enter Sample page Field 5 SETUP S Edit mode is enabled and the cur sor flashes on the leftmost digit...

Page 745: ...ormation message is present You are advised to define the priority of the messages with regard to the page using the Exchange area Chapter 38 Command area see also Software Manual For graphic terminals without LEDs the screen shows Note that the symbol is a triangle containing the character i Information messages can be seen only when the event triggering them is still present When you press you e...

Page 746: ...is displayed again VT60 info messages Format Four rows of 20 characters for the text of the message Example with two messages When you press the next message is displayed When you press the first message is displayed again Pressure exceeds safety limit First message Info Water level lower than work threshold Second message Help Pressure exceeds safety limit First message Pressure exceeds safety li...

Page 747: ...symbol is not present if the message appeared the last time the display mode for information messages was accessed Example with two messages When you press you select the second message displayed as the cur rent message the black bar indicates message has been selected NB hav ing already appeared before this message is not accompanied by a closed envelope Pressure exceeds safety limit First messag...

Page 748: ...ou press the next message is displayed When you press the first message is displayed again VT170W info messages Format Two rows of 20 characters for the text of the message One row for any data field which in that particular situation could indi cate a safety or warning limit value One row for the date and time the signal occurred The first display is indicated by two characters on the far right o...

Page 749: ... right of the third line of the display These symbols are not present if the message appeared the last time the display mode for information messages was accessed Example with two messages When you press the next message is displayed Pressure exceeds safety limit First message 125 5 01 07 1998 10 45 PgDn Water level lower than work threshold Second message 40 01 07 1998 10 46 PgUp Pressure exceeds...

Page 750: ...ue One row for the date and time the signal occurred The first display is indicated by a closed envelope at the top left of the display This symbol is not present if the message appeared the last time the display mode for information messages was accessed Example with two messages VT310W When you press the second page containing the second message appears NB having already appeared before this mes...

Page 751: ...e third message displayed as the current message Pressure exceeds safety limit 125 5 01 07 1998 10 45a HELP Temperature exceeds safety limit 1700 01 07 1998 10 55a HELP First message Second message PgDn Down Up PgDn Pressure exceeds safety limit 125 5 01 07 1998 10 45a HELP Temperature exceeds safety limit 1700 01 07 1998 10 55a HELP First message Second message PgDn Down Up PgDn Second message Th...

Page 752: ...l is not present if the message appeared the last time the display mode for information messages was accessed Example with five messages When you press you select the second message displayed as the cur rent message the black bar indicates message has been selected NB hav shift PgUp Pressure exceeds safety limit 125 5 01 07 1998 10 45a HELP Temperature exceeds safety limit 1700 01 07 1998 10 55a H...

Page 753: ...125 5 01 07 1998 10 45a Water level below min 10 01 07 1998 11 00a The level of gas saturation in the boiler room has reached the first warning level 345 01 07 1998 19 00a First message Second message Third message Fourth message PgDn Temperature exceeds safety limit 1700 01 07 1998 10 55a Pressure esxceeds safety limit 125 5 01 07 1998 10 45a Water level below min 10 01 07 1998 11 00a The level o...

Page 754: ...c terminals without LEDs the screen shows Water pump stoppage 01 07 1998 19 45a Fifth message shift PgUp Temperature exceeds safety limit 1700 01 07 1998 10 55a Pressure esxceeds safety limit 125 5 01 07 1998 10 45a Water level below min 10 01 07 1998 11 00a The level of gas saturation in the boiler room has reached the first warning level 345 01 07 1998 19 00a First message Second message Third m...

Page 755: ...er display mode signaled by the fixed light LED of that coming on where the first page has the format set out below the format changes according to the type of VT When you press again you enter the second page whose format is set out below valid only for VT170W and VT190W The VT can provide an automatic sequential display of information mes sages on command from the device see Chapter 38 Command a...

Page 756: ...d not acknowledged Example with three alarms When you press you select the second alarm as the current alarm and third alarm appears Note that the second alarm is accompanied by the char acter followed by the date and time indicating that the event triggering the alarm disappeared before the acknowledgment operation All this is also emphasized by the appropriate symbol VT170W alarms The first page...

Page 757: ... the Event acknowledged but still present the character for the date and time of the Event disappeared but not acknowledged Example with two alarms The character indicates that the alarm has not yet been acknowledged The acknowledgment operation pressing changes the character sig nalling the status of the event to When you press the second page appears When you press or the first page is appears a...

Page 758: ...the display of Event in but not acknowledged indicated by Event in present and acknowledged indicated by Event out and not acknowledged indicated by The second page has the following format Numerical identification of the ISA 1A alarm One row starting with the character for the date and time of the appearance of the event Event in One row starting with the character for the date and time of the Ev...

Page 759: ...ed by the date and time indicates that the event triggering the alarm disappeared before the acknowledgment operation VT300W VT310W VT320W alarms The page has the following format Numerical identification of the ISA 1A alarm Four rows of 30 characters with character height of X1 or two rows of 15 with character height of X2 for the text of the message VT300 VT310W Ack Ack All First page of the fir...

Page 760: ... Event out and not acknowledged Example with three alarms VT300W When you press the second page appears containing the second alarm Note that the second alarm is accompanied by the character fol lowed by the date and time indicating that the event triggering the alarm disappeared before the acknowledgment operation All this is also empha sized by the appropriate symbol When you press the next page...

Page 761: ...ress again you select the third alarm as the current alarm Third alarm PgUp Temperature over the safety limit 01 07 1998 12 29p HELP 1600 01 07 1998 12 28p 0006 shift PgUp The pressure in the tank is over the maximum limit 150 0 01 07 1998 11 32a HELP Water level is lower than the threshold stopping the process 10 01 07 1998 11 32a 01 07 1998 11 37a HELP First alarm Second alarm PgDn Down Up 0001 ...

Page 762: ... situation could indi cate a safety or warning limit value One row starting with the character for the date and time of the appearance of the event Event in One row starting with the character for the date and time of the Event acknowledged but still present the character for the date and time of the Event out but not acknowledged Graphic indication of the status of the alarm Second alarm Third al...

Page 763: ...ted by the appropri ate alarm status symbol ISA 1A alarm history buffer When an event occurs to which an alarm has been assigned the terminal registers it chronologically in an area of the internal memory called the Alarm history buffer If while displaying the first page of the alarm you press or at any point you enter display mode signaled by the fixed light LED of that coming on When you press a...

Page 764: ...ee also Software Manual to be able to tell when the buffer is full The format is similar to that of the alarms except that a character H is added in front of the number of the alarm see the formats of the various products VT130W history buffer Example with two alarms When you press the next page appears containing the following alarm When you press the previous page appears again When you press yo...

Page 765: ...ure over the First page of history buffer of the first alarm maximum limit 150 0 Alarm H Alarm n 420 01 07 1998 11 32a Second page of history buffer of the first alarm 01 07 1998 11 38a 01 07 1998 11 52a Alarm Esc Clr Esc Clr PgDn H Alarm n 470 Water level lower First page of history buffer of the second alarm than stop threshold 10 Alarm H Alarm n 470 01 07 1998 11 32a Second page of the second a...

Page 766: ...following alarm When you press the next page appears containing the following alarm Alarm Esc Clr Esc Clr PgDn First page of the history buffe of the second alarm H Alarm n 470 Water level lower than threshold stopping process 10 Alarm Second page of the history buffer of the second alarm H Alarm n 470 01 07 1998 11 32a 01 07 1998 11 47a 01 07 1998 11 37a First alarm H Pressure in the tank over ma...

Page 767: ... 07 1998 12 28p 0006 H 01 07 1998 12 29p shift PgUp Esc Pressure in the tank is over the maximum limit 150 0 First alarm Second alarm PgDn Down Up 01 07 1998 11 32a 01 07 1998 11 33a 01 07 1998 11 55a H 0001 Water level is lower than the threshold stopping the process 10 01 07 1998 11 32a 01 07 1998 11 37a 0032 01 07 1998 11 40a H PgDn First alarm Second alarm PgDn Down Up Water level is lower tha...

Page 768: ...tional information relevant to the operation Pressure in the tank is over maximum limit 150 0 First alarm Second alarm PgDn Down Up 01 07 1998 11 32a 01 07 1998 11 33a 01 07 1998 11 55a H 0001 Water level is lower than the threshold for stopping the process 10 01 07 1998 11 32a 01 07 1998 11 37a 0032 01 07 1998 11 40a H Esc Water level below the threshold level stopping the processo 10 01 07 1998 ...

Page 769: ...n When you press you enter display mode indicated by the fixed light of the LED in the case of those terminals that have it When you press you quit display mode for help messages and return to the previous display mode Help VT150W VT160W Others Help Help Shift Help Esc Shift VT50 VT60 H elp H ist VT130W Shift F1 Esc VT50 Esc VT330W Others Help Esc VT60 Esc Clr ...

Page 770: ......

Page 771: ...VT585W VT585WB info messages 37 22 VT595W info messages 37 24 ISA 1A alarms 37 24 VT525H VT1x5 515 525 555 56xW alarms 37 25 Vertical VT1x5W alarms 37 27 VT575W VT580W VT585W VT585WB alarms 37 29 VT595W alarms 37 30 ISA 1A alarm history buffer 37 31 VT525H VT1x5 515 525 555 56xW history buffer 37 32 Vertical VT1x5W history buffer 37 32 VT575W VT580W VT585W VT585WB history buffer 37 33 VT595W histo...

Page 772: ...ble 37 1 Chapter 37 Keys displayed used for settings after setting the value or automatically when the input timeout see Software Manual elapses whereby the variation is quit Table 37 1 Keys displayed used for settings Part 1 of 2 Keys Function The function assumed depends on the type of field to be set Increases decreases the value the digit the character The function assumed depends on the type ...

Page 773: ...or is enabled by pressing the arrow and then entering a digit or by means of increasing the character see Table 37 1 Chapter 37 Keys displayed used for settings To change the adjacent digits or characters the cursor has to be positioned manually Examples of varying fields The examples below are offered to clarify how this works For the sake of simplicity we have chosen a single product VT555W but ...

Page 774: ...37 4 Sample page Field 1 9999 Touch the display field 9999 7 ESC 8 9 4 5 6 1 0 2 3 9999 Editmodeisenabled thecursormovestotheright most digit of the data least significant digit 7 ESC 8 9 4 5 6 0 2 3 0001 Press the 1 to enter the first digit of the new value the field assumes the value 1 1 ...

Page 775: ... a decimal numerical field except that a decimal point can be inserted anywhere in the field The following example shows a variation total change in field 2 from 10 3256 to 321 65 7 ESC 8 9 1 5 6 0 Press 2 3 4 to complete the entering of the new value press to attribute a sign and Enter to confirm 4 2 3 1234 Sample page Field 2 10 3256 Touch the display field 10 3256 ...

Page 776: ...4 5 6 1 0 2 3 10 3256 Editmodeisenabled thecursormovestotheright most digit of the data least significant digit 7 ESC 8 9 4 5 6 0 2 1 0000003 Press the 3 to enter the first digit of the new value the field assumes the value 3 3 7 ESC 8 9 4 5 6 0 3 0000321 Press 2 and then 1 to complete the whole field 1 2 ...

Page 777: ...be used to enter the letters A B C and D E F respectively by pressing the same key more than once All the other from 2 to 9 have only a numerical significance The fol lowing example illustrates the variation total change mode of field 3 from 1A3F to B23C 7 ESC 8 9 4 5 6 0 3 000321 Press to insert the decimal point 2 1 4 7 ESC 8 9 1 2 3 0 Press 6 and then 5 to complete the entering of the new value...

Page 778: ...ple page Field 3 1A3F Touch the display field 1A3F 7 ESC SHIFT 8 9 4 d 5 e 6 f 1 a 0 2 b 3 c 1A3F Edit mode is enabled the cursor moves to the rightmost digit of the data least significant digit 7 ESC 8 9 4 d 5 e 6 f 1 a 0 3 c 000B Press SHIFT 2 b to enter the first digit of the new value SHIFT 2 b ...

Page 779: ...ple shows the variation partial change of Field 3 from B23C to BABA 7 ESC 8 9 4 d 5 e 6 f 1 a 0 B23C Press 2 b 3 c and SHIFT 3 c to com plete the entering of the new value press Enter to confirm SHIFT 2 b 3 c Sample page Field 3 B23C Touch the display field B23C ...

Page 780: ...6 f 1 a 0 2 b 3 c B23C Editmodeisenabled thecursormovestotheright most digit of the data least significant digit 7 ESC SHIFT 8 9 4 d 5 e 6 f 1 a 0 2 b 3 c B23C Position the cursor on the second digit by press ing the twice 7 ESC 8 9 4 d 5 e 6 f 2 b 0 3 c BA3C Press SHIFT 1 a to enter the digit of the new value SHIFT 1 a ...

Page 781: ...example shows the changing of Field 4 from MOTOR 1 to VALVE 3 5 7 ESC 8 9 4 d 5 e 6 f 1 a 0 BABC Press SHIFT 2 b to enter the third digit of the new value SHIFT 2 b 3 c Press SHIFT 1 a to enter the last digit of the new value press Enter to confirm the value 7 ESC 8 9 4 d 5 e 6 f 2 b 0 3 c BABA SHIFT 1 a ...

Page 782: ...e page MOTOR 1 Touch the display field MOTOR 1 Field 4 ESC VOTOR 1 Press or to poll all the characters of the table of the font assigned see Software Man ual halt at the character V ESC VATOR 1 Press to move to the next character then press or to poll all the characters until reaching the character A ...

Page 783: ...f field 5 that can assume 4 different states to which the following 4 symbolic texts cor respond SETUP STOP MANUAL AUTOMATIC Let us assume that SETUP is the starting value and MANUAL the final one ESC VALVE 3 5 Repeat the operations until the word is finished press Enter to confirm Sample page SETUP Touch the display field SETUP Field 5 ...

Page 784: ...l 2 21 of 25 02 2008 37 14 ESC SETUP Edit mode is enabled the cursor moves to the leftmost digit of the data ESC STOP The first time is pressed the field assumes the value STOP ESC MANUAL The next time is pressed the field assumes the value MANUAL press Enter to confirm ...

Page 785: ...ymbolic field The following example shows the variation of Field 6 that can assume 4 different states to which are assigned the following 4 images Let us assume as a starting value and as a final value Sample page Touch the display field Field 6 ESC Edit mode is enabled ...

Page 786: ...25 02 2008 37 16 Varying the value of a binary field The following example illustrates the variation total change of Field 7 from 1010 to 1111 ESC The first time is pressed the field assumes the value ESC The next time is pressed the field assumes the value press Enter to confirm ...

Page 787: ... 37 17 Sample page Field 7 1010 Touch the display field 1010 ESC 1 0 1010 Editmodeisenabled thecursormovestotheright most digit of the data least significant digit ESC 0 1111 Press 1 4 times to enter the new value press Enter to confirm 1 ...

Page 788: ... 2 21 of 25 02 2008 37 18 Changing the value of a bar data The following example illustrates the variation of Field 8 that is to be changed from a value of 100 to a value of 50 Sample page Field 8 Touch the display field BAR ESC Edit mode is enabled VAL 100 MIN 0 MAX 100 ...

Page 789: ...type of message is used is at the discretion of the programmer Information messages When an event occurs which has an information message assigned to it the display shows Note that the symbol is a triangle containing the character i Information messages are only displayable so long as the event triggering them is present When the above symbol is touched on the screen you enter display mode where t...

Page 790: ...by a closed envelope at the top left of the display This symbol is not present if the message appeared the last time the display mode for information messages was accessed Example with three messages ESC By pressing the next page containing the third message appears NB having already appeared before this second message is not accompanied by a closed envelope Pressure exceeds safety limit 125 5 01 ...

Page 791: ...imit value One row for the date and time the signal occurred The first display is indicated by a closed envelope at the top left of the display This symbol is not present if the message appeared the last time the display mode for information messages was accessed Example with two messages Bypressing thenextpagecontainingthesecond message appears NB having already appeared before thissecondmessagei...

Page 792: ...articular situation could indi cate a safety or warning limit value One row for the date and time the signal occured The first display is indicated by a closed envelope at the top left of the display This symbol is not present if the message appeared the last time the display mode for information messages was accessed Example with five messages Water lev lower than By pressing the previous page re...

Page 793: ...min 10 01 07 1998 11 00a The level of gas saturation in the boiler room has reached the first warning level 345 01 07 1998 19 00a HELP By pressing the next page containing the fifth message appears First message Second message Third message Fourth message ESC Water pump stoppage 01 07 1998 19 45a By pressing the previous page returns containing the first four messages Fifth message ...

Page 794: ...has been assigned the screen shows Note that the symbol is a triangle containing the character i ISA alarms are displayed from the time when the event triggering the alarm occurs Eventin untilthereisanindividualacknowledgmentoperation touch ing the symbol on the screen related to the alarm to be acknowledged Event acknowledged and the triggering event is no longer present Event out ESC HELP Temper...

Page 795: ...e has the following format Numerical identification of the ISA 1A alarm Four rows of 30 characters with character height of X1 or two rows of 15 with character height of X2 for the text of the message One row for any data field which in that particular situation could indi cate a safety or warning limit value One row starting with the character for the date and time of the appearance of the event ...

Page 796: ...ate symbol The pressure in the tank exceeds the max limit HELP Water level is lower than the stop threshold of the process 10 01 07 1998 11 32a 01 07 1998 11 37a HELP First alarm Second alarm HIST 150 0 01 07 1998 11 32a 0001 0032 ESC When you press the first page appears Note that the third alarm is accompanied by the char acter followed by the date and time indicat ing that the event triggering ...

Page 797: ...ter for the date and time of the Event acknowledged but still present the character for the date and time of the Event out but not acknowledged Graphic indication of the status of the alarm Event in and not acknowledged Event in present and acknowledged Event out and not acknowledged Examples with three alarms HELP The pressure in the tank exceeds the max limit 150 0 First alarm 01 07 1998 11 32a ...

Page 798: ...en you press the first page appears When you press the next page appears containing the third alarm Note that the second alarm is accompanied by the character followed by the date and time indicating that the event trig gering the alarm disappeared before the acknowledgment operation All this is also emphasized by the appropriate symbol 0032 HIST 01 07 1998 11 32a 01 07 1998 11 37a ...

Page 799: ...alue One row starting with the character for the date and time of the appearance of the event Event in One row starting with the character for the date and time of the Event acknowledged but still present the character for the date and time of the Event out but not acknowledged Graphic indication of the status of the alarm Event in and not acknowledged Event in present and acknowledged Event out a...

Page 800: ...e status of the alarm Event in and not acknowledged Event in present and acknowledged Event out and not acknowledged ESC HELP Water level is lower than stop threshold of the process 10 01 07 1998 11 32a 01 07 1998 11 37a Pressure in tank is over safety limit 150 0 01 07 1998 11 32a Temperature over safety limit 1600 01 07 1998 12 28p 01 07 1998 12 29p HELP Note that the second alarm is accompanied...

Page 801: ...ult the chapter Status area of the VT Chapter 38 Status area for the terminal see also Software Manual to be able to tell when the buffer is full ESC HELP Water level is lower than stop threshold of the process 10 Pressure in tank is over safety limit 150 0 01 07 1998 11 32a Temperature over safety limit 1600 01 07 1998 12 28p 01 07 1998 12 29p HELP Note that the second alarm is accompanied by the...

Page 802: ...uffer Example with one alarm ESC When ESC is pressed you return to the display mode for alarms Water level is lower than the threshold stopping the process 10 01 07 1998 11 32a 01 07 1998 11 37a First alarm Second alarm 0032 01 07 1998 11 40a Pressure in the tank over the maximum limit 150 0 01 07 1998 11 32a 01 07 1998 11 33a 01 07 1998 11 55a 0001 H H The pressure in the tank exceeds the max lim...

Page 803: ...7 1998 11 32a 01 07 1998 11 37a 01 07 1998 11 40a Pressure in the tank is over the safety limit 150 0 01 07 1998 11 32a 01 07 1998 11 33a 01 07 1998 11 35a Temperature over safety limit 1600 01 07 1998 12 28p 01 07 1998 12 29p 01 07 1998 12 29p By pressing the ESC you return to the alarm display First alarm Second alarm Third alarm 0001 0032 0006 H H H By pressing the ESC you return to the alarm d...

Page 804: ...P the help messaage is displayed Touching the ESC on the screen takes you back to the previ ous screenful The length of the message can be VT155W up to 34 characters x 16 rows VT155W Vertical up to 21 characters x 24 rows VT185W up to 34 characters x 16 rows VT185W Vertical up to 21 characters x 24 rows VT505H up to 34 characters x 16 rows VT505W up to 34 characters x 16 rows VT515W up to 34 chara...

Page 805: ...6 rows VT155W Vertical up to 21 characters x 24 rows VT185W up to 34 characters x 16 rows VT185W Vertical up to 21 characters x 24 rows VT505H up to 34 characters x 16 rows VT505W up to 34 characters x 16 rows VT515W up to 34 characters x 16 rows VT525H up to 40 characters x 16 rows VT525W up to 40 characters x 16 rows VT555W up to 40 characters x 16 rows VT56xW up to 40 characters x 16 rows VT575...

Page 806: ......

Page 807: ...nternal keys Real Time 38 25 Status area for external keys Real Time 38 25 Status area for printer 38 26 Status area for trends 38 28 Command response area 38 29 Command area external LEDs fixed light 38 30 Command area external LEDs blinking light 38 31 Command area internal red LEDs fixed light 38 32 Command area internal red LEDs blinking light 38 33 Command area internal green LEDs fixed light...

Page 808: ...us area for internal keys Status area for external keys Status area for internal keys Real Time Status area for external keys Real Time Status area for printer Trend status area Command response area Command Areas Command area external LEDs fixed light Command area external LEDs blinking light Command area internal red LEDs fixed light Command area internal red LEDs blinking light Command area int...

Page 809: ...1 Sequence Identifier 38 3 Meaning of value contained in the Word 2 Page Identifier 38 4 Meaning of value contained in the Word 3 Field Identifier The tables appearing below refer to VTs with a touch screen 38 5 Meaning of bits of Word 0 Status word 38 6 Meaning of value contained in the Word 1 38 7 Meaning of value contained in the Word 2 Page Identifier 38 8 Meaning of value contained in the Wor...

Page 810: ...yet acknowledged 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 COMMAND NOT VALID Status 1 when the last command sent by the device has not been carried out 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 ALARM HISTORY BUFFER 80 FULL Status 1 when the alarm history buffer is 80 full and therefore close to saturation 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 ALARM HISTORY BUFFER FULL Status 1 when the alarm history buffer is full and can hold no more alarms 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 MACRO FUNCTI...

Page 811: ...2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 HELP MESSAGES FOR PROJECT PAGES 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 HELP MESSAGES FOR ISA ALARMS 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 ISA ALARMS 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 RECIPE DIRECTORY 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 HELP MESSAGES FOR INFORMATION MESSAGES 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 ALARM HISTORY BUFFER 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 PROJECT INFORMATION 3 3 9 9 SETTING CLOCK 10 10 SYSTEM MESSAGES ASSIGNED TO RECIPES 11 11 SYSTEM MESSAGES ASSIGNED TO PASSWORDS 12 12 not p...

Page 812: ... Status 1 so long as there is an ISA alarm in but not yet acknowledged 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 COMMAND NOT VALID Status 1 when the last command sent by the device has not been carried out 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 ALARM HISTORY BUFFER 80 FULL Status 1 when the alarm history buffer is 80 full and therefore close to saturation 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 ALARM HISTORY BUFFER FULL Status 1 when the ala...

Page 813: ... 525 H VT 525 W VT 555 W VT 56x W VT 575 W VT 580 W VT 585 W VT 585 WB VT 595 W CONTEXT IDENTIFIER Contains the identifying value of the context if the context is not Project Page Word 2 0 INFORMATION MESSAGES 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SEQUENCE DIRECTORY PAGE DIRECTORY 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 DRIVER SERVICE PAGES 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 HELP MESSAGES FOR PROJECT PAGES 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3...

Page 814: ...he Bits of the Status Word for the Green LEDs WORD 0 NUMBER OF THE BIT MEANING OF THE BIT VT 50 VT 60 VT 150 W VT 160 W VT 170 W VT 190 W VT 300 W VT 310 W VT 320 W VT 330 W 0 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 1 F2 F2 F2 F2 F2 F2 F2 2 F3 F3 F3 F3 F3 F3 F3 3 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 4 F5 F5 F5 F5 F5 F5 F5 5 F6 F6 F6 F6 F6 6 F7 F7 F7 F7 F7 7 F8 F8 F8 F8 F8 8 F9 F9 F9 F9 F9 9 F10 F10 F10 F10 F10 10 F11 F11 F11 F11 F1...

Page 815: ...T MEANING OF THE BIT VT 50 VT 60 VT 150 W VT 160 W VT 170 W VT 190 W VT 300 W VT 310 W VT 320 W VT 330 W 0 F17 F17 F17 F17 F17 1 F18 F18 F18 F18 F18 2 F19 F19 F19 F19 F19 3 F20 F20 F20 F20 F20 4 F21 F21 F21 F21 F21 5 F22 F22 F22 F22 6 F23 F23 F23 F23 7 F24 F24 F24 F24 8 F25 F25 9 F26 F26 10 F27 F27 11 F28 F28 12 13 14 15 not present ...

Page 816: ...E BIT VT 50 VT 60 VT 150 W VT 160 W VT 170 W VT 190 W VT 300 W VT 310 W VT 320 W VT 330 W 0 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 1 F2 F2 F2 F2 F2 2 F3 F3 F3 F3 F3 3 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 4 F5 F5 F5 F5 F5 5 F6 F6 F6 F6 F6 6 F7 F7 F7 F7 F7 7 F8 F8 F8 F8 F8 8 F9 F9 F9 F9 F9 9 F10 F10 F10 F10 F10 10 F11 F11 F11 F11 F11 11 F12 F12 F12 F12 12 F13 F13 F13 13 F14 F14 F14 14 F15 F15 F15 15 F16 F16 F16 not present ...

Page 817: ... Bits of the Status Word for Red LEDs WORD 3 NUMBER OF THE BIT MEANING OF THE BIT VT 50 VT 60 VT 150 W VT 160 W VT 170 W VT 190 W VT 300 W VT 310 W VT 320 W VT 330 W 0 F17 F17 F17 1 F18 F18 F18 2 F19 F19 3 F20 F20 4 F21 F21 5 F22 F22 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 not present ...

Page 818: ...RD 0 STATUS WORD 1 STATUS WORD Table 38 13 Meaning of the Bits of the Status Word for External LEDs WORD 0 MEANING OF THE BIT NUMBER OF THE BIT VT150W VT100MT1000 VT160W VT300W VT310W VT320W VT100MT1000 E1 0 0 0 E2 1 1 1 E3 2 2 2 E4 3 3 3 E5 4 4 4 E6 5 5 5 E7 6 6 6 E8 7 7 7 E9 8 8 8 E10 9 9 9 E11 10 10 10 E12 11 11 11 E13 12 12 12 E14 13 13 13 E15 14 14 14 E16 15 15 15 not present ...

Page 819: ... Meaning of the Bits of the Status Word for External LEDs WORD 1 MEANING OF THE BIT NUMBER OF THE BIT VT150W VT100MT1000 VT160W VT300W VT310W VT320W VT100MT1000 E17 0 0 0 E18 1 1 1 E19 2 2 E20 3 3 E21 E22 E23 E24 E25 E26 E27 E28 E29 E30 E31 E32 not present ...

Page 820: ... 14 14 14 14 14 TRANSFER REQUEST Status1whentheterminalwantstostarttotransfer 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 not present Table 38 16 Meaning of the Bits of the Status Word for Recipes WORD 0 MEANING OF THE BIT NUMBER OF THE BIT VT 155 W VT 185 W VT 505 H VT 505 W VT 515 W VT 155 W VT 185 W VT 505 H VT 505 W VT 525 H VT 525 W VT 555 W VT 56x W VT 575 W VT 580 W VT 585 W VT 585 WB VT 595 W TIMEOUT FOR RECIPE ...

Page 821: ...e Bits of the Status Word for Internal Keys Word 4 38 22 Meaning of the Bits of the Status Word for Internal Keys Word 5 The tables appearing below refer to VTs with a touch screen 38 17 Meaning of the Bits of the Status Word for Internal Keys Word 0 The keys enclosed in a box with a bold border put the related bit at 1 when pressed with The above is valid for VT50 and VT60 In the case of other te...

Page 822: ... 15 not used Shift F1 Esc Help Esc E sc C lr Esc Clr Esc Clr Esc Clr Esc Clr Esc Clr Esc Clr Esc Clr Esc F2 F3 F3 Space F4 F4 Enter Enter Enter F5 F4 Enter Enter Enter Enter Enter Enter Enter Enter Info F2 P g D n PgDn PgDn PgDn PgDn PgDn PgDn PgDn PgDn Help F1 P g U p PgUp PgUp PgUp PgUp PgUp PgUp PgUp PgUp F1 Esc F1 Help Help Info Info Info Info Info Info F2 F2 H elp H ist Info Info Help Help He...

Page 823: ...ft 0 A B C 0 A B C 0 A B C 0 A B C 0 A B C 0 A B C 0 A B C 0 A B C Ctrl 1 D E F 1 D E F 1 D E F 1 D E F 1 D E F 1 D E F 1 D E F 1 D E F Alt 2 G H I 2 G H I 2 G H I 2 G H I 2 G H I 2 G H I 2 G H I 2 G H I Tab 3 J K L 3 J K L 3 J K L 3 J K L 3 J K L 3 J K L 3 J K L 3 J K L Spare 4 M N O 4 M N O 4 M N O 4 M N O 4 M N O 4 M N O 4 M N O 4 M N O 5 P Q R 5 P Q R 5 P Q R 5 P Q R 5 P Q R 5 P Q R 5 P Q R 5 ...

Page 824: ...p 6 n p n p 7 n p n p 8 n p n p 9 n p n p 10 n p n p 11 n p n p 12 n p n p 13 n p n p 14 n p n p 15 n p n p not used n p not present Shift F1 F1 F6 F1 F6 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 0 F2 F2 F7 F2 F7 F2 F2 F2 F2 F2 1 F3 F3 F8 F3 F8 F3 F3 F3 F3 F3 2 F4 F4 F9 F4 F9 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 3 F5 F5 F10 F5 F10 F5 F5 F5 F5 F5 4 F6 F6 F6 F6 F6 5 F7 F7 F7 F7 F7 6 F8 F8 F8 F8 F8 7 F9 F9 F9 F9 F9 8 F10 F10 F10 F10 F10 9 F11 F11 F...

Page 825: ... n p 4 n p n p n p n p n p 5 n p n p n p n p n p 6 n p n p n p n p n p 7 n p n p n p n p n p 8 n p n p n p n p n p 9 n p n p n p n p n p 10 n p n p n p n p n p 11 n p n p n p n p n p 12 n p n p n p n p n p 13 n p n p n p n p n p 14 n p n p n p n p n p 15 n p n p n p n p n p not used n p not present Shift F17 F17 F17 F17 B A F18 F18 F18 F18 D C F19 F19 F19 F19 F E F20 F20 F20 F20 H G F21 F21 F21 F2...

Page 826: ...n p 4 n p n p n p n p n p n p n p n p n p n p 5 n p n p n p n p n p n p n p n p n p n p 6 n p n p n p n p n p n p n p n p n p n p 7 n p n p n p n p n p n p n p n p n p n p 8 n p n p n p n p n p n p n p n p n p n p 9 n p n p n p n p n p n p n p n p n p n p 10 n p n p n p n p n p n p n p n p n p n p 11 n p n p n p n p n p n p n p n p n p n p 12 n p n p n p n p n p n p n p n p n p n p 13 n p n p n p ...

Page 827: ... p n p n p n p n p n p n p n p n p 5 n p n p n p n p n p n p n p n p n p n p 6 n p n p n p n p n p n p n p n p n p n p 7 n p n p n p n p n p n p n p n p n p n p 8 n p n p n p n p n p n p n p n p n p n p 9 n p n p n p n p n p n p n p n p n p n p 10 n p n p n p n p n p n p n p n p n p n p 11 n p n p n p n p n p n p n p n p n p n p 12 n p n p n p n p n p n p n p n p n p n p 13 n p n p n p n p n p n p...

Page 828: ...02 2008 38 22 Table 38 23 Meaning of the Bits of the Status Word for Internal Keys Word 0 BIT WORD 0 VT505H VT52H 0 HAND SHAKE HAND SHAKE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 not used n p non presente F1 F1 F2 F2 F3 F3 F4 F4 F5 F5 F6 F6 F7 F7 F8 F8 F9 F9 F10 F10 ...

Page 829: ...AL KEYS 1 STATUS WORD for EXTERNAL KEYS Table 38 24 Meaning of the Bits of the Status Word for External Keys WORD 0 MEANING OF BIT NUMBER OF THE BIT VT150W VT100MT1000 VT160W VT300W VT310W VT320W VT100MT1000 E1 0 0 0 E2 1 1 1 E3 2 2 2 E4 3 3 3 E5 4 4 4 E6 5 5 5 E7 6 6 6 E8 7 7 7 E9 8 8 8 E10 9 9 9 E11 10 10 10 E12 11 11 11 E13 12 12 12 E14 13 13 13 E15 14 14 14 E16 15 15 15 not present ...

Page 830: ...38 24 Table 38 25 Meaning of the Bits of the Status Word for External Keys WORD 1 MEANING OF BIT NUMBER OF THE BIT VT150W VT100MT1000 VT160W VT300W VT310W VT320W VT100MT1000 E17 0 0 0 E18 1 1 1 E19 2 2 E20 3 3 E21 E22 E23 E24 E25 E26 E27 E28 E29 E30 E31 E32 not present ...

Page 831: ...key is set at 1 only if pressed at the same time as another key e g The Handshake bit is set at 1 by the VT whenever one or more keys are pressed it is set at 0 when no key is pressed For details concerning these Status words see Page 38 15 Status area for external keys Real Time This area consists of a maximum of 2 words numbered from 0 to 1 For details concerning these Status words see Page 38 2...

Page 832: ...oblem fol low the command to print n p n p 1 n p n p 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 n p n p n p 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 n p n p n p n p n p n p n p REPORT PRINTING IN PROGRESS Status 1 as long as the function lasts n p n p 3 n p n p 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 n p n p n p 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 DIRECT PRINTING OF THE INFORMA TION MESSAGE IN PROGRESS Status 1 as long as the function lasts n p n p 4 n p n p 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 n p n p n p 4...

Page 833: ... p n p n p n p n p n p n p n p REPORT PRINTING IN PROGRESS Status 1 as long as the function lasts n p n p n p n p n p 3 3 3 3 3 3 n p n p n p n p n p n p n p 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 DIRECT PRINTING OF THE INFORMA TION MESSAGE IN PROGRESS Status 1 as long as the function lasts n p n p n p n p n p 4 4 4 4 4 4 n p n p n p n p n p n p n p 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 DIRECT PRINTING OF THE ISA ALARME IN PROGRESS Status 1 as l...

Page 834: ...n p 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 TREND NUMBER 6 BUFFER FULL Status 1when the buffer is full n p 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 TREND NUMBER 7 BUFFER FULL Status 1when the buffer is full n p 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 TREND NUMBER 8 BUFFER FULL Status 1when the buffer is full n p 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 TREND NUMBER 9 BUFFER FULL Status 1when the buffer is full n p 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 TREND NUMBER 10 BUFFER F...

Page 835: ...e use of this area see Software Manual NO OF WORD NAME OF WORD 0 COMMAND 1 PARAMETER 1 2 PARAMETER 2 3 PARAMETER 3 COMMAND 14 Reads current time Word Value Meaning 0 14 1 HH Hours in BCD MM Minutes in BCD 2 SS Seconds in BCD Not used 3 Not used COMMAND 15 Reads current date Word Value Meaning 0 15 1 GG Day in BCD MMM Month in BCD 2 AAAA Year in BCD 3 DOW Day of the week 0 Sunday Not Used ...

Page 836: ... COMMANDING EXTERNAL LEDS 1 WORD COMMANDING EXTERNAL LEDS Table 38 29 Meaning of Bits of Word Commanding External LEDs fixed light WORD 0 MEANING OF BIT BIT NUMBER VT150W VT100MT1000 VT160W VT300W VT310W VT320W VT100MT1000 E1 0 0 0 E2 1 1 1 E3 2 2 2 E4 3 3 3 E5 4 4 4 E6 5 5 5 E7 6 6 6 E8 7 7 7 E9 8 8 8 E10 9 9 9 E11 10 10 10 E12 11 11 11 E13 12 12 12 E14 13 13 13 E15 14 14 14 E16 15 15 15 not pres...

Page 837: ...us words see Page 38 30 Table 38 30 Meaning of Bits of Word Commanding External LEDs fixed light WORD 1 MEANING OF BIT BIT NUMBER VT150W VT100MT1000 VT160W VT300W VT310W VT320W VT100MT1000 E17 0 0 0 E18 1 1 1 E19 2 2 E20 3 3 E21 E22 E23 E24 E25 E26 E27 E28 E29 E30 E31 E32 not present NO OF WORD NAME OF WORD 0 WORD COMMANDING EXTERNAL LEDS 1 WORD COMMANDING EXTERNAL LEDS ...

Page 838: ...g of Bits of Word Commanding internal red LEDs fixed light WORD 0 BIT NUMBER MEANING OF BIT VT 50 VT 60 VT 130 W VT 150 W VT 160 W VT 170 W VT 190 W VT 300 W VT 310 W VT 320 W VT 330 W 0 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 1 F2 F2 F2 F2 F2 2 F3 F3 F3 F3 F3 3 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 4 F5 F5 F5 F5 F5 5 F6 F6 F6 F6 F6 6 F7 F7 F7 F7 F7 7 F8 F8 F8 F8 F8 8 F9 F9 F9 F9 F9 9 F10 F10 F10 F10 F10 10 F11 F11 F11 F11 F11 11 F12 F12 F12 F1...

Page 839: ... 22 28 Table 38 32 Meaning of Bits of Word Commanding internal red LEDs fixed light WORD 1 BIT NUMBER MEANING OF BIT VT 50 VT 60 VT 130 W VT 150 W VT 160 W VT 170 W VT 190 W VT 300 W VT 310 W VT 320 W VT 330 W 0 F17 F17 F17 1 F18 F18 F18 2 F19 F19 3 F20 F20 4 F21 F21 5 F22 F22 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 not present NO OF WORD NAME OF WORD 0 WORD COMMANDING RED LEDS 1 WORD COMMANDING RED LEDS ...

Page 840: ...ernal green LEDs fixed light WORD 0 BIT NUMBER MEANING OF BIT VT 50 VT 60 VT 130 W VT 150 W VT 160 W VT 170 W VT 190 W VT 300 W VT 310 W VT 320 W VT 330 W 0 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 1 F2 F2 F2 F2 F2 F2 F2 2 F3 F3 F3 F3 F3 F3 F3 3 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 4 F5 F5 F5 F5 F5 F5 F5 5 F6 F6 F6 F6 F6 6 F7 F7 F7 F7 F7 7 F8 F8 F8 F8 F8 8 F9 F9 F9 F9 F9 9 F10 F10 F10 F10 F10 10 F11 F11 F11 F11 F11 11 F12 F12 F12 F1...

Page 841: ...reen LEDs fixed light WORD 1 BIT NUMBER MEANING OF BIT VT 50 VT 60 VT 130 W VT 150 W VT 160 W VT 170 W VT 190 W VT 300 W VT 310 W VT 320 W VT 330 W 0 F17 F17 F17 F17 F17 1 F18 F18 F18 F18 F18 2 F19 F19 F19 F19 F19 3 F20 F20 F20 F20 F20 4 F21 F21 F21 F21 F21 5 F22 F22 F22 F22 6 F23 F23 F23 F23 7 F24 F24 F24 F24 8 F25 F25 9 F26 F26 10 F27 F27 11 F28 F28 12 13 14 15 not present NO OF WORD NAME OF WOR...

Page 842: ... 150 W VT 160 W VT 170 W VT 190 W VT 300 W VT 310 W VT 320 W VT 330 W VT 155 W VT 185 W VT 505 H VT 505 W VT 515 W VT 525 H VT 525 W VT 555 W VT 56x W VT 575 W VT 580 W VT 585 W VT 585 WB 1 2 3 01 Forces sequence 02 Forces page 03 Forces current field 04 Bit structured protection mask 05 Forces system context 06 Sets autoscroll for mes sages 07 Sets current language 08 Priority of messages 09 Oper...

Page 843: ...ation of recipe transfer 21 Request for a recipe 22 Send recipe to VT without overwriting 23 Send recipe to VT over writing 24 Command internal green LEDs 25 Command flashing of internal green LEDs Table 38 35 List of commands available Part 2 of 4 COMMAND CODE PARAMS DESCRIPTION VT 50 VT 60 VT 130 W VT 150 W VT 160 W VT 170 W VT 190 W VT 300 W VT 310 W VT 320 W VT 330 W VT 155 W VT 185 W VT 505 H...

Page 844: ... LEDs 34 Command flashing of external LEDs 35 Report printing 36 Printing of the ISA alarms history buffer 37 Hardcopy 38 Form feed 39 Zeroes number of print pages Table 38 35 List of commands available Part 3 of 4 COMMAND CODE PARAMS DESCRIPTION VT 50 VT 60 VT 130 W VT 150 W VT 160 W VT 170 W VT 190 W VT 300 W VT 310 W VT 320 W VT 330 W VT 155 W VT 185 W VT 505 H VT 505 W VT 515 W VT 525 H VT 525...

Page 845: ...m history buffer and trend buffers 46 Command for operating working of touch screen 47 48 Copy recipes into the remanent memory 49 Sets value display bright ness Table 38 35 List of commands available Part 4 of 4 COMMAND CODE PARAMS DESCRIPTION VT 50 VT 60 VT 130 W VT 150 W VT 160 W VT 170 W VT 190 W VT 300 W VT 310 W VT 320 W VT 330 W VT 155 W VT 185 W VT 505 H VT 505 W VT 515 W VT 525 H VT 525 W...

Page 846: ...fier Indicates the page number of the sequence that must be displayed If the value is zero or a value that is not valid the first page of the sequence is displayed 2 Page control The parameter has 2 identifiers one for each byte The high byte more significant contains the CURRENT FIELD that is the field in the page on which the cursor must be positioned If the value is zero or a value that is not ...

Page 847: ... PROJECT INFORMATION 10 SET CLOCK 11 SYSTEM MESSAGES ASSIGNED TO RECIPES 12 SYSTEM MESSAGES ASSIGNED TO PASSWORDS 2 Not used 3 Not used Only in the case of Touch Screen COMMAND 06 Sets autoscroll for messages Word Value Meaning 0 6 1 Setting autoscroll Logic state 1 or other than zero activates the function Logic state 0 deactivates the function 2 Not used 3 Not used COMMAND 07 Sets current langua...

Page 848: ...4 OFF ON CONTINUOUS BUZZER 5 OFF ON INFORMATION MESSAGE AUTOSCROLL 2 3 Only in the case of Touch Screen COMMAND 10 Set time for autoscroll of INFORMATION MESSAGES Word Value Meaning 0 10 1 Time of autoscroll Value in secs 1 60 indicating time to elapse before display of next INFORMATION MESSAGE page 2 Not used 3 Not used COMMAND 11 Set time for autoscroll of alarm messages Word Value Meaning 0 11 ...

Page 849: ...lue Meaning 0 15 1 Not used 2 Not used 3 Not used COMMAND 16 Sets current time Word Value Meaning 0 16 Updates terminal clock with values sent by device 1 HH Hours in BCD MM Minutes in BCD 2 SS Seconds in BCD Not used 3 Not used COMMAND 17 Sets current date Word Value Meaning 0 17 1 GG Day in BCD MMM Month in BCD 2 AAAA Year in BCD 3 DOW Day of the week 0 Sunday Not Used COMMAND 18 Read trend from...

Page 850: ...mory Parameters 1 and 2 contain the 4 character code name of the recipe Logic state 0 of bit 4 of VT STATUS word in VT STATUS AREA indicates that the code requested is present in the data memory of the VT while logic state 1 indicates the absence of the code With the code present transmission starts in SYNCHRONIZED or UNSYNCHRONIZED mode as deter mined by the project 1 Character 1 Character 2 2 Ch...

Page 851: ...r 2 2 Character 3 Character 4 3 Not Used COMMAND 24 Command internal green LEDs Word Value Meaning 0 24 Makes it possible to switch on and off the green LEDs internal to the VT and corresponding to the bits of the words of parameters 1 and 2 1 BIT TYPE of VT 150 160 170 190 300 310 320 330 0 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 1 F2 F2 F2 F2 F2 F2 F2 2 F3 F3 F3 F3 F3 F3 F3 3 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 4 F5 F5 F5 F5 F5 ...

Page 852: ... F8 F8 8 F9 F9 F9 F9 F9 9 F10 F10 F10 F10 F10 10 F11 F11 F11 F11 F11 11 F12 F12 F12 F12 F12 12 F13 F13 F13 F13 F13 13 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 14 F15 F15 F15 F15 F15 15 F16 F16 F16 F16 F16 2 BIT TYPE of VT 150 160 170 190 300 310 320 330 0 F17 F17 F17 F17 F17 1 F18 F18 F18 F18 F18 2 F19 F19 F19 F19 F19 3 F20 F20 F20 F20 F20 4 F21 F21 F21 F21 F21 5 F22 F22 F22 F22 6 F23 F23 F23 F23 7 F24 F24 F24 F24 8 F...

Page 853: ...aning 0 29 Stops the reading of the channel corresponding to the trend buffer defined in parameter 1 The com mand only applies to trends in Single Automatic Sampling mode 1 Buffer number 2 Not used 3 Not used COMMAND 30 Start trend Word Value Meaning 0 30 Starts the reading of the channel corresponding to the trend buffer defined in parameter 1 The com mand only applies to trends in Single Automat...

Page 854: ...1 BIT TYPE of VT 170 190 300 310 320 330 0 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 1 F2 F2 F2 F2 F2 2 F3 F3 F3 F3 F3 3 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 4 F5 F5 F5 F5 F5 5 F6 F6 F6 F6 F6 6 F7 F7 F7 F7 F7 7 F8 F8 F8 F8 F8 8 F9 F9 F9 F9 F9 9 F10 F10 F10 F10 F10 10 F11 F11 F11 F11 F11 11 F12 F12 F12 F12 12 F13 F13 F13 13 F14 F14 F14 14 F15 F15 F15 15 F16 F16 F16 2 BIT TYPE of VT 170 190 300 310 320 330 0 F17 F17 F17 1 F18 F18 F18 2 F19 F19 3 F...

Page 855: ... switched on using the command 31 1 BIT TYPE of VT 170 190 300 310 320 330 0 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 1 F2 F2 F2 F2 F2 2 F3 F3 F3 F3 F3 3 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 4 F5 F5 F5 F5 F5 5 F6 F6 F6 F6 F6 6 F7 F7 F7 F7 F7 7 F8 F8 F8 F8 F8 8 F9 F9 F9 F9 F9 9 F10 F10 F10 F10 F10 10 F11 F11 F11 F11 F11 11 F12 F12 F12 F12 12 F13 F13 F13 13 F14 F14 F14 14 F15 F15 F15 15 F16 F16 F16 2 BIT TYPE of VT 170 190 300 310 320 330 0 F17 F...

Page 856: ...f parameters 1 and 2 1 BIT TYPE of VT 150 VT100MT1000 160 300 310 320 VT100MT1000 0 E1 E1 E1 1 E2 E2 E2 2 E3 E3 E3 3 E4 E4 E4 4 E5 E5 E5 5 E6 E6 E6 6 E7 E7 E7 7 E8 E8 E8 8 E9 E9 E9 9 E10 E10 E10 10 E11 E11 E11 11 E12 E12 E12 12 E13 E13 E13 13 E14 E14 E14 14 E15 E15 E15 15 E16 E16 E16 2 BIT TYPE of VT 150 VT100MT1000 160 300 310 320 VT100MT1000 0 E17 E17 E17 1 E18 E18 E18 2 E19 E19 3 E20 E20 4 5 6 ...

Page 857: ...ly have been switched on using the command 33 1 BIT TYPE of VT 150 VT100MT1000 160 300 310 320 VT100MT1000 0 E1 E1 E1 1 E2 E2 E2 2 E3 E3 E3 3 E4 E4 E4 4 E5 E5 E5 5 E6 E6 E6 6 E7 E7 E7 7 E8 E8 E8 8 E9 E9 E9 9 E10 E10 E10 10 E11 E11 E11 11 E12 E12 E12 12 E13 E13 E13 13 E14 E14 E14 14 E15 E15 E15 15 E16 E16 E16 2 BIT TYPE of VT 150 VT100MT1000 160 300 310 320 VT100MT1000 0 E17 E17 E17 1 E18 E18 E18 2...

Page 858: ...d feed the sheet 1 Choice of VT port for communication with printer 0 ASP 15 LPT 2 Not used 3 Not used COMMAND 39 Reset print sheet counter to zero Word Value Meaning 0 39 Makes it possible to reset print sheet counter to zero and therefore start from sheet 1 again 1 Not used 2 Not used 3 Not used COMMAND 40 Command makes internal green LEDs light up flashing Word Value Meaning 0 40 Lights up inte...

Page 859: ...e choices are 0 MSP 1 ASP 2 Memory Card 2 Select the transmission speed Allows the selection of the speed of transfer when the source selected is MSP or ASP this parameter is not considered with other sources The possible choices are 0 300 bit sec 1 600 bit sec 2 1200 bit sec 3 2400 bit sec 4 4800 bit sec 5 9600 bit sec 6 19200 bit sec 7 38400 bit sec 8 57600 bit sec 9 115200 bit sec 3 Not used CO...

Page 860: ...ost when the VT is switched off COMMAND 48 Copy recipes into the remanent memory Word Value Meaning 0 48 This allows all the recipes in the volatile memory to be copied into the remanent memory Flash 1 Not used 2 Not used 3 Not used COMMAND 49 Sets value display brightness Word Value Meaning 0 48 This allows to set value of display brightness 1 0 0 19 100 2 Not used 3 Not used ...

Page 861: ...405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 39 1 Chapter 39 Communication protocols Contents Page List of protocols 39 2 This chapter consists of 2 pages ...

Page 862: ...n the market thanks to specially designed communication protocols that act as an interface between the VT and the Device List of protocols A list exists showing which devices the VT can communicate with and including further technical information that may be useful to the program mer This list is included on the cd rom VTWIN KIT ...

Page 863: ...r VT50 40 3 Editing parameters for VT60 40 4 Editing parameters for VT150 160W 40 5 Free terminal control characters 40 6 Key codes for VT50 40 9 Key codes for VT60 40 9 Key codes for VT150 160W 40 10 Code of External keys for MT1000 and VT160W 40 13 Free terminal in Network 40 14 Example of handling 40 16 This chapter consists of 18 pages ...

Page 864: ...e recognizes and if necessary uses it The free terminal protocol also allows you to create a network of up to 31 terminals 01 31 the connection must be made using serial RS485 see Chapter 35 Network connection To transfer the driver to the VT the terminal must be set up for reception see Setting up for reception of the various terminals before proceeding to transfer see Software Manual Once the tr...

Page 865: ...changed by pressing standard protocol or ver 3 0 protocol the screen shows F1 Esc F5 F1 Esc F5 Help Help Info F5 VT Address 00 Up Down Enter Changes params Help Info F5 Baud Rate 9600 Up Down Enter Changes params Help Info F5 Param PN 8db 2sb Up Down Enter Changes params VT 50 TERMINAL Vx xx ...

Page 866: ...e changed by pressing standard protocol or ver 3 0 protocol the screen shows F1 Esc F4 Enter Help Esc F4 Enter F1 VT Address 00 Up Down Enter F1 Info Changes params F4 Enter Baud Rate 9600 Up Down Enter F1 Info Changes params F4 Enter Param PN 8db 2sb Up Down Enter F1 Info Changes params F4 Enter VT 60 TERMINAL Vx xx READY ...

Page 867: ...by pressing twice standard protocol or ver 3 0 protocol the screen shows shift Esc Clr Enter PgUp VT Address 00 Up Down Enter PgUp PgDn Changes params Enter Enter PgUp PgDn Changes params Baude Rate 9600 Up Down Enter PgUp PgDn Changes params Enter Param PN 8db 2sb Up Down Enter VT xxx TERMINAL Vx xx READY ...

Page 868: ...erminal Character Code Meaning Effect Decimal Ascii BS 8 Back Space Takes the cursor one space back on the same line cancel ing the character CR 13 Carriage Return Takes the cursor to the begin ning of the following line LF 10 Line Feed Takes the cursor to the next line leaving it in the same position ESC 27 Escape Signals the beginning of a command EOT 4 End Of Text Signals the end of a command T...

Page 869: ...5 9600 Default 06 19200 07 38400 08 57600 09 115200 pp 00 EVEN 7 1 01 EVEN 7 2 02 EVEN 8 1 03 EVEN 8 2 04 ODD 7 1 05 ODD 7 2 06 ODD 8 1 07 ODD 8 2 08 NONE 7 1 09 NONE 7 2 10 NONE 8 1 11 NONE 8 2 Default Setting serial communication parameters When you use the command ESC Pbbpp EOT to configure the serial port with parameters dif ferent from the current ones you must also reconfigure the device con...

Page 870: ...MT1000 99 All ss 00 Off Default 01 On 02 Flashing Commands the state of the LEDs associ ated with the internal and external keys ESC Saabb EOT aa 00 Whenkeysarepressed 01 Intermittent bb 00 Disabled Default 01 Enabled Commands the state of the buzzer in the terminal ESC Kmm EOT mm 00 Numeric mode Default 01 ASCII mode Setting of the keyboard operation mode Table 40 2 Command characters Part 3 of 3...

Page 871: ...oned when the are pressed the VT sends a hexadeci mal code to the connected device The table below lists the association between code and Table 40 3 Association between keys and hexadecimal codes Key Hexadecimal code Only key 09 14 04 15 02 16 0B 17 0D 18 01 12 03 10 Shift F1 Esc F2 F3 F4 F5 Help Info Table 40 4 Association between keys and hexadecimal codes Key Hexadecimal code Only key 01 14 03 ...

Page 872: ...s on the keys the second sends the code of the alpha betical characters The default setting is Numeric but this can be changed by sending the command K see Page 40 6 The table below lists the asso ciation between code and Table 40 5 Association between keys Numeric mode and hexadecimal codes Part 1 of 2 Key Hexadecimal code Only key 81 86 82 87 83 88 84 89 85 8A 0C 0C 0B 0B 01 05 03 06 04 04 02 02...

Page 873: ...e code relating to the letter S 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 Table 40 6 Association between keys Ascii mode and hexadecimal codes Part 1 of 3 Key Hexadecimal code Only key 86 87 88 Send no code Table 40 5 Association between keys Numeric mode and hexadecimal codes Part 2 of 2 Key Hexadecimal code Only key shift 1 D E F 2 G H I 3 J K L 4 M N O 5 P Q R 6 S T U 7 V W X 8 Y Z ...

Page 874: ... 27 0A 27 27 27 0D Reinitializa tion of VT 0D 0D 0D 30 30 41 42 43 31 31 44 45 46 32 32 47 48 49 33 33 4A 4B 4C 34 34 4D 4E 4F 35 35 50 51 52 36 36 53 54 55 Table 40 6 Association between keys Ascii mode and hexadecimal codes Part 2 of 3 Key Hexadecimal code Only key Send no code shift F1 F6 F2 F7 F3 F8 F4 F9 F5 F10 Info Help PgUp PgDn Space Esc Clr Enter 0 A B C 1 D E F 2 G H I 3 J K L 4 M N O 5 ...

Page 875: ...37 56 57 58 38 38 59 5A 2D 39 39 2B 2F 3D Table 40 6 Association between keys Ascii mode and hexadecimal codes Part 3 of 3 Key Hexadecimal code Only key Send no code shift F1 F6 F2 F7 F3 F8 7 V W X 8 Y Z 9 Table 40 7 Association between MT1000 keys and hexadecimal codes Hexadecimal code A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 AA AB AC AD AE AF B0 B1 B2 B3 ...

Page 876: ...dresses in the network 01 31 If the address is 00 the ter minal is not considered to be a participant in the network To change the network address see Page 40 3 Once the terminal has been connected to the network with an address other than 00 and switched on the VT terminal s behavior is different from that seen in the previous paragraphs The VT will not respond to any command unless it has been a...

Page 877: ... having the code 01Hex The response to the second request would be 0203 2 code 03Hex the response to the third request would be 0102 1 code 09Hex In order to communicate that there are no keys in its buffer the VT will respond to any further request with 0000 There follows a list of permissible commands Help Info F1 Esc Table 40 9 Command characters with terminal in network Command Parameters Effe...

Page 878: ... driver see Page 40 2 and set the various commu nication parameters see Page 40 3 Once the settings have been completed the following page appears First check that the VT communicates with the device Send the following string ESC Y EOT If communication has been correctly established the VT responds with the following message OK At this point the device must interpret the response and control begin...

Page 879: ...on the cursor on the co ordinate 1 5 y x Send the following string ESC A0105 EOT The display now shows Send the rest of the text to be displayed OPERATOR Send the follow ing string OPERATOR The display now shows At this point the device must be set up to control the keys when pressed when is pressed the VT responds with the following character CR _ GOOD MORNING_ GOOD MORNING _ GOOD MORNING OPERATO...

Page 880: ...he text Send the following string ESC C EOT The display is now cleared and the cursor positioned automatically in the top left corner with the coordinate 0 0 y x Now send the text to be displayed READY Send the following string READY The display now shows The above represents only a simple example of how to use the Free Termi nal _ READY_ ...

Page 881: ...COPCO DRIVE 41 10 BERGER LAHR DRIVE 41 11 CONTROL TECHNIQUES DRIVE 41 11 DANFOSS DRIVE 41 12 ELAU DRIVE 41 13 EUROTHERM DRIVE 41 14 EVER DRIVE 41 15 FANUC ROBOTICS DRIVE 41 15 FAGOR DRIVE 41 16 GALIL DRIVE 41 17 GE DRIVE 41 17 HITACHI DRIVE 41 17 KEB DRIVE 41 18 INDRAMAT DRIVE 41 19 LENZE DRIVE 41 19 OMRON DRIVE 41 21 OSAI DRIVE 41 21 PANASONIC DRIVE 41 21 PARKER AUTOMATION DRIVE 41 22 ROBOX DRIVE...

Page 882: ...TALOGIC BARCODE READER 41 29 ABB PLC 41 30 AEG MODICON PLC 41 33 ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 41 34 ALTUS PLC 41 38 ATOS PLC 41 39 BECKHOFF PLC 41 40 BOSCH PLC 41 42 B R AUTOMATION PLC 41 42 CROUZET RPX PLC 41 42 FOXBORO PLC 41 43 FUJI PLC 41 43 GE FANUC PLC 41 44 GEFRAN PLC 41 45 LG PLC 41 52 HITACHI PLC 41 46 IDEC IZUMI PLC 41 48 KLÖCKNER MOELLER PLC 41 49 KEYENCE PLC 41 50 KOYO PLC 41 50 KUHNKE PLC 41 52 ...

Page 883: ...EICHER PLC 41 65 SIEMENS PLC 41 66 SPRECHER SCHUH PLC 41 69 SQUARE D PLC 41 69 TELEMECANIQUE PLC 41 70 TEXAS INSTRUMENTS PLC 41 74 TOSHIBA PLC 41 76 HBM BALANCE SCALES 41 77 ASCON THERMOREGULATOR 41 78 GEFRAN THERMOREGULATOR 41 78 HENGSTLER THERMOREGULATOR 41 79 WEST THERMOREGULATOR 41 80 Cable information summary 41 81 Contents Page This chapter consists of 84 pages ...

Page 884: ... in order to limit as much as possible the influence of these disturbances good quality shielded cables must be used The table below lists the characteristics of the cable to be used for serial connection Particular care should be taken in the choice and lay out of cables specially with regard to the VT Device connection serial cable Always Find the shortest route Lay disturbed cables separately D...

Page 885: ... correct way of connecting the shield The interface cable braiding must be electrically connected both to the shell and the body of the connector at both ends of the cable If the connection operation cannot be carried out at the Device side due to the particular type of serial connector the braiding will have to be taken outside the connector and connected to the earth terminal This operation must...

Page 886: ...ential earth bars which receive earth connections from loads such as inverters drives stepper motors and generally speaking any type of load which could be a source of strong disturbance The Device VT serial communication cable must be single piece Terminal type joins and PLUG SOCKET arrangements are inadmissible Should the installation system in question necessitate that breaks be made although t...

Page 887: ... female Order code NOT CODED Conversion from MSP to ASP RS232 See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield Max 15 cm TxRx TxRx 22 10 Vcc 7 13 GND TxRx 8 15 TxRx CTS 10 11 RTS 7 16 GND Vcc 4 5 RTS CTS VT side D Sub 15 pin male Cable side D Sub 25 pin female Order code NOT CODED Conversion from MSP to ASP RS485 See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield Max 15 cm Rx Tx 2 3 7 8 Rx Tx RTS 3 2 5 7 4 5 CT...

Page 888: ...BCD Dip switch 4 RxD TxD RTS CTS GND 3 2 7 25 TxD RxD GND 2 3 5 4 5 15 18 VT side D Sub 25 pin male Drive side D Sub 9 pin male Order code NOT CODED INDAX TRIAX PENTAX RS232 NOTE The length of the cable must not exceed 3 meters with a transmission speed of 38400 Baud See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield TX RX TX 23 12 13 RX RX 2 8 1 TX 24 15 18 RX 25 7 GND RTS 4 5 CTS 4 TX 220 Ω 1 4 W 5 GND ...

Page 889: ... 4 5 RTS CTS 7 25 GND TxRx 22 9 TxRx 10 TxRx TxRx 220 Ω 1 4 W 7 470 Ω 1 4 W 8 5 GND SHD 1 VT side D Sub 25 pin male Drive side D Sub 9 pin male Order code NOT CODED BIVECTOR Series 300 RS485 See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield TX RX TX 23 12 13 RXD RXD 7 3 4 TXD 24 15 18 RX 25 7 GND RTS GND 5 4 5 CTS 2 TXD 220 Ω 1 4 W 220 Ω 1 4 W VT side D Sub 25 pin male Order code NOT CODED IMC S CLASS RS...

Page 890: ...1 4 5 15 18 VT side D Sub 25 pin male Order code NOT CODED Series DMC RS232 N B On the device set protocol Computer Mode with the aid of ATLAS DMC User s manual See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield Drive side D Sub 15 pin male Max 15 m TX RX TX 23 12 13 RX RX 10 9 12 TX SHD 1 24 15 18 RX 25 7 GND RTS GND 7 4 5 CTS 11 TX 220 Ω 1 4 W 220 Ω 1 4 W VT side D Sub 25 pin male Order code NOT CODED S...

Page 891: ...000 40 Drive Side D Sub 9 pin female See note RxD TxD RTS CTS GND 3 2 7 25 TxD RxD GND 3 2 5 4 5 15 18 VT side D Sub 25 pin male Order code NOT CODED Unidrive RS232 Communication card UD71 required Set parameter 0 32 ANSI2 See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield Drive side D Sub 9 pin male Max 15 m 16 18 1 470 Ω 1 4 W 15 4 5 RTS CTS 7 25 GND TxRx 22 7 10 TxRx 2 220 Ω 1 4 W 7 470 Ω 1 4 W 6 3 VT ...

Page 892: ... Drive side RJ45 8 pin Order code CVPLC33102 Commander SE CTNET RS485 Set parameter 41 ANSI Set parameter 42 Baud rate Set parameter 43 Address See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield Front View 16 18 470 Ω 1 4 W 15 4 5 RTS CTS 7 25 GND TxRx 22 10 TxRx 220 Ω 1 4 W 7 470 Ω 1 4 W 69 TxRx 68 TxRx SHD VT side D Sub 25 pin male Order code NOT CODED VLT2800 5000 6000 RS485 See Chapter 41 Connecting t...

Page 893: ...tion Block prepared by ELAU makes available 4 data arrays whose length can be defined by the user for communication with the VT 16 470 Ω 1 4 W 7 25 GND 7 470 Ω 1 4 W VCC Tx 23 12 Tx 220 Ω 1 4 W Rx 13 24 Rx 120 Ω 1 4 W 18 15 4 5 RTS CTS RxD RxD 4 5 3 2 TxD TxD VT side D Sub 25 pin male Order code NOT CODED Max 4 RS422 See notes to follow See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield Drive side D Sub 9...

Page 894: ...ad only The VT cannot access this data area W3000 Word read only The VT accesses this data area by selecting the option Input Register as data area of the variabile in the VT Warning The programmer must check that the change of the data field of the VT page does not get enabled If the change of the data field is enabled the equivalent address in Array W4000 will be overwritten W4000 Word read writ...

Page 895: ... depends on the transmission speed See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield Trasmission speed kbit s Length m 20 800 50 600 125 500 250 250 500 100 1000 25 Drive side RJ45 8 pin See note Front View RxD TxD RTS CTS GND 3 2 7 25 TxD RxD GND 4 5 15 18 3 2 5 VT side D Sub 25 pin male Order code NOT CODED Ever MPP14 01 RS232 See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield Drive side D Sub 9 pin female RxD...

Page 896: ...See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield Drive side D Sub 9 pin male Max 15 m 330 Ω 1 4 W RxD422 RxD422 9 8 16 470 Ω 1 4 W 7 25 GND 7 470 Ω 1 4 W VCC Tx 23 12 Tx 330 Ω 1 4 W 470 Ω 1 4 W 470 Ω 1 4 W Rx 13 24 Rx 330 Ω 1 4 W 7 6 TxD422 TxD422 330 Ω 1 4 W 18 15 4 5 RTS CTS VT side D Sub 25 pin male Order code NOT CODED DNC PROTOCOL RS422 See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield Drive side D Sub 9 ...

Page 897: ... m 16 18 470 Ω 1 4 W 15 7 25 22 10 220 Ω 1 4 W 7 470 Ω 1 4 W 4 5 RTS CTS GND TxRx TxRx P10 TxRx TxRx FSI VCC SHD VT side D Sub 25 pin male Order code NOT CODED VAT 23D RS485 See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield Drive side Terminals RECEIVE RECEIVE 2 5 6 3 SEND SEND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TX RX TX 23 12 13 24 15 18 RX 25 7 GND RTS 4 5 CTS 220 Ω 1 4 W 220 Ω 1 4 W VT side D Sub 25 pin male Drive side ...

Page 898: ...e Max 15 m TX RX TX 23 12 13 RX RX 4 5 8 TX 24 15 18 RX 25 7 GND RTS 4 5 CTS 9 TX 220 Ω 1 4 W 220 Ω 1 4 W VT side D Sub 25 pin male Order code NOT CODED Combivert F4C F4S RS422 See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield Drive side D Sub 9 pin male 16 18 470 Ω 1 4 W 15 4 5 RTS CTS 7 25 GND TxRx 22 10 TxRx 220 Ω 1 4 W 7 470 Ω 1 4 W 4 9 8 5 VT side D Sub 25 pin male Order code NOT CODED Combivert F4C...

Page 899: ...18 470 Ω 1 4 W 15 4 5 RTS CTS 7 25 GND TxRx 22 4 RS485 10 TxRx 5 RS485 220 Ω 1 4 W 7 470 Ω 1 4 W VCC VT side D Sub 25 pin male Order code NOT CODED PCCR0 GP1 RS485 SERIAL PORT 1 connection requires no parametrization while the TYPE param eter like ASCII HOST needs to be set for SERIAL PORT 2 The MODE parameter must be set as RS485 See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield Drive side D Sub 9 pin m...

Page 900: ...5 CAN Connection For the DRIVE side cable termination use the related resistence 120Ohms sup plied with the device between the HI and LO terminals in the X4 connector see also Drive manual NOTE The length depends onthe type of cable See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield Length m Type of cable Resistence Ohm Km Capacity nF Km 300 LIYCY 2x2x0 5 mmq 40 130 1000 CYPIMF 2x2x0 5 mmq 40 60 Drive sid...

Page 901: ...r 41 Connecting the cable shield Drive side Terminals TxD RxD RTS CTS GND 2 3 7 25 Rx Tx GND 2 3 7 8 5 4 5 15 18 6 4 RTS CTS DSR DTR VT side D Sub 25 pin male Drive side D Sub 9 pin female Order code NOT CODED 10 Series GP RS232 See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield Max 15 m RxD TxD RTS CTS GND 3 2 7 25 Rx 5 4 Tx 3 4 5 15 18 7 6 8 5 4 3 2 1 GND VT side D Sub 25 pin male Order code NOT CODED M...

Page 902: ...MPUMOTOR 6K RS232 Dip Switch SW1 1 OFF 2 OFF 3 OFF 4 OFF 5 OFF 6 OFF 7 OFF 8 OFF WARNING For Hardware configuration refer to manual 6K Series Hardware Installation Guide See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield Max 15 m 1 4 TDB RDB RDA TDA 18 15 4 5 RTS CTS 7 25 GND TxRx 22 10 TxRx 120 Ω 1 4 W 7 6 8 7 GND VT side D Sub 25 pin male Drive side D Sub 9 pin female Order code NOT CODED COMPUMOTOR 6K ...

Page 903: ...For Hardware configuration refer to manual 6K Series Hardware Installation Guide See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield RxD TxD RTS CTS GND 3 2 7 25 Tx Rx GND 3 2 5 4 5 15 18 VT side D Sub 25 pin male Drive side D Sub 9 pin female Order code NOT CODED GT6 GV6 Controller RS232 See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield Max 15 m RxD TxD RTS CTS GND 3 2 7 25 Rx Tx GND 2 3 6 4 5 4 5 15 18 7 8 DTR ...

Page 904: ... male TX RX TX 23 12 13 24 RX 4 5 RTS CTS 7 25 GND 3 TX 220 Ω 1 4 W 220 Ω 1 4 W BR 7 RX RX 2 4 1 TX 15 18 BR 6 SHD 8 VT side D Sub 25 pin male Order code NOT CODED HPD 2 5 8 16 RS422 Device address 0 31 See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield Drive side D Sub 9 pin male 16 SHD 8 18 470 Ω 1 4 W 15 4 5 RTS CTS 7 25 GND TxRx 22 10 TxRx 220 Ω 1 4 W 7 470 Ω 1 4 W BR TX 6 1 2 RX 4 RX TX 3 BR 7 VT sid...

Page 905: ...e cable shield 16 18 470 Ω 1 4 W 15 4 5 RTS CTS 7 25 GND TxRx 22 10 TxRx 220 Ω 1 4 W 7 470 Ω 1 4 W TxRx GND TxRx SHD VT side D Sub 25 pin male Order code NOT CODED MOVIDYN RS485 Communication card SEW EURODRIVE USS21A required See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield Drive side Terminals RxD TxD RTS CTS GND 3 2 7 25 TxD RxD GND 2 3 5 4 5 15 18 VT side D Sub 25 pin male Drive side D Sub 9 pin mal...

Page 906: ...5 RTS CTS TxRx 22 3 TxRx 10 TxRx 7 TxRx 220 Ω 1 4 W 470 Ω 1 4 W 5V 9 5 0V 7 25 GND 7 VT side D Sub 25 pin male Order code NOT CODED SLINK 3 RS485 WARNING If the jumpers S18 and S19 on the regulator card are in position A serial line gal vanically isolated from the regulator section pin 5 and 9 must be connected to the power unit See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield Drive side D Sub 9 pin mal...

Page 907: ...ield Drive side D Sub 9 pin male RxD TxD RTS CTS GND 3 2 7 25 Tx Rx GND 4 2 5 4 5 15 18 VT side D Sub 25 pin male Order code NOT CODED FAS FDS SDS 4000 RS232 See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield Drive side D Sub 9 pin female Max 15 m 16 18 470 Ω 1 4 W 15 4 5 RTS CTS 7 25 GND TxRx 22 10 TxRx 220 Ω 1 4 W 7 470 Ω 1 4 W 2 6 3 7 TxRx TxRx VT side D Sub 25 pin male Order code NOT CODED DMBL Series...

Page 908: ...ield Drive side D Sub 9 pin male RxD TxD RTS CTS GND 3 2 7 25 Rx 5 4 Tx 3 4 5 15 18 7 6 8 5 4 3 2 1 GND VT side D Sub 25 pin male Drive side Minidin 8 pin male Order code NOT CODED TRIO MOTION Modbus RS232 See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield Front View Max 15 m 7 6 8 5 4 3 2 1 13 24 Rx 7 Tx 8 Rx 7 25 GND 15 18 Tx 23 12 Tx Tx 2 Rx 1 Rx VT side D Sub 25 pin male Order code NOT CODED TRIO MOTI...

Page 909: ...008 41 29 DATALOGIC BARCODE READER RxD TxD CTS RTS GND 3 2 5 4 7 25 15 18 Tx Rx RTS CTS GND 2 3 4 5 7 VT side D Sub 25 pin male Barcode side D Sub 9 pin female Order code NOT CODED DL 910 RS232 See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield ...

Page 910: ...de and the programming software no longer functions properly To get the PLC back to normal functioning use the programming S W to access the PLC commun 2 menu and select the 3 terminal emulation option and press the CTRL and W keys together At the end the PLC responds by offering the prompt sign NOTE ON DIRECT PROTOCOL You can select the communication speed of 19200 Baud in the PLC by connecting p...

Page 911: ...P CTS P 12 14 RTS N CTS N 13 15 7 25 GND 9 TxD N 220 Ω 1 4 W 220 Ω 1 4 W VT side D Sub 25 pin male Order code CVPLC14402 CS31 07KP92 R101 MODBUS RTU Communication module COM3 and COM4 ports RS422 STANDARD MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield PLC side D Sub 15 pin male 16 SHD 1 18 470 Ω 1 4 W 15 4 5 RTS CTS 7 25 GND TxRx 22 10 RxD P TxD P 10 TxRx 11 RxD N TxD N 220 Ω 1 4 W...

Page 912: ... 41 Connecting the cable shield Front View Max 15 m RxD TxD RTS CTS GND 3 2 7 25 TxD RxD GND 2 3 5 4 5 15 18 VT side D Sub 25 pin male PLC side D Sub 9 pin male Order code CVPLC21202 AC70 RS232 See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield Max 15 m 3 Rx 4 TD 3 0V 2 Tx 5 RD 6 0V 7 25 GND 15 18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 VT side D Sub 25 pin male PLC side RJ45 8 pin Max 15 m Order code CVPLC14802 ACS210 RS232 See...

Page 913: ...he cable shield RxD TxD RTS CTS GND 3 2 7 25 TxD RxD GND 3 2 6 4 5 4 5 15 18 7 8 VT side D Sub 25 pin male PLC side D Sub 9 pin male Max 15 m Order code CVPLC17102 COMPACT A120 A250 Port 1 Port 2 RS232 See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield RxD TxD RTS CTS GND 3 2 7 25 TxD RxD GND 3 4 6 7 5 4 5 15 18 RTS CTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 VT side D Sub 25 pin male PLC side RJ45 8 pins Max 15 m Order code CVP...

Page 914: ... Ω 1 4 W 7 470 Ω 1 4 W 4 5 RTS CTS GND TxRx 1 TxRx 2 VCC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SHD VT side D Sub 25 pin male Order code CVPLC07112 SLC 500 CPU 5 02 5 03 RS485 Address of VT 1 31 Address of PLC 1 31 Screen side SLC500 connected to earth terminal of PLC power unit WARNING See warnings regarding VT SLC500 connection N B Open Integer file for at least two elements Example N7 0 N7 1 See Chapter 41 Connecting...

Page 915: ... Example N7 0 N7 1 See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield 16 18 470 Ω 1 4 W 15 4 5 RTS CTS 7 25 GND Rx Rx 7 470 Ω 1 4 W VCC RTS CTS 4 5 RTS CTS 19 13 Tx 23 16 12 Tx 3 220 Ω 1 4 W 220 Ω 1 4 W Rx 13 14 24 Rx 2 220 Ω 1 4 W 220 Ω 1 4 W Tx Tx 6 20 8 DSR DTR DCD 22 23 10 DSR DTR DCD VT side D Sub 25 pin male PLC side D Sub 25 pin male Order code CVPLC07302 PLC 5 11 20 30 40 40L 60 60L RS422 CH0 SERI...

Page 916: ...r at least two elements Example N7 0 N7 1 N B Programming SW necessary for Allen Bradley V4 00 and all after See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield RxD TxD RTS CTS GND 3 2 7 25 TxD RxD GND 2 3 5 4 5 15 18 VT side Active D Sub 25 pin male PLC side D Sub 9 pin male Max 15 m Order code CVPLC07602 MICROLOGIX CPU1000 1200 and 1500 RS232 MICROLOGIX SERIAL PORT SET DF1 full duplex mode MICRO Baud rat...

Page 917: ...RTS CTS 7 25 GND TxRx TxRx 1 2 1 n Last PLC side RJ45 8 pins Order code NOT CODED SLC 500 CPU 5 02 5 03 RS485 Cable valid for several VTs connected to a single PLC Address of VT 1 31 Address of PLC 1 31 N B Open Integer file for at least two elements Example N7 0 N7 1 NOTE If using the 1747 AIC module use the cable without the RJ45 connector employ ing the terminals 1 5 A 2 4 B GND 2 SHLD See Chap...

Page 918: ...e shield RxD TxD RTS CTS GND 3 2 7 25 Tx Rx GND 2 3 5 4 5 15 18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SHD VT side D Sub 25 pin male PLC side RJ45 8 pin Max 3 m Order code CVPLC27202 ALNET 1 RS232 See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield Front View 16 18 470 Ω 1 4 W 15 4 5 RTS CTS 7 25 GND TxRx 22 10 TxRx 220 Ω 1 4 W 7 470 Ω 1 4 W 3 8 4 9 TxD TxD VCC RxD RxD VT side D Sub 25 pin male Order code CVPLC027302 ALNET 1 RS4...

Page 919: ... shield Front View RxD TxD RTS CTS GND 3 2 7 25 Tx Rx GND 3 2 5 4 5 15 18 6 5 4 3 2 1 VT side D Sub 25 pin male PLC side RJ11 6 pin Max 15 m Order code CVPLC29102 MPC1600 MPC2002 MPC4004 RS232 See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield Front View 16 18 470 Ω 1 4 W 15 4 5 RTS CTS 7 25 GND TxRx 22 10 TxRx 220 Ω 1 4 W 7 470 Ω 1 4 W SHD 2 DO RI 1 DO RI VCC VT side D Sub 25 pin male Order code CVPLC292...

Page 920: ...TxD RxD GND 8 7 9 4 5 15 18 VT side D Sub 25 pin male PLC side D Sub 9 pin male Max 15 m Order code CVPLC28202 BX3100 RS232 COM2 Port See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield 16 18 470 Ω 1 4 W 15 4 5 RTS CTS 7 25 GND TxRx 22 6 TxRxD 10 TxRx 1 TxRxD 220 Ω 1 4 W 7 470 Ω 1 4 W VT side D Sub 25 pin male PLC side D Sub 9 pin male Order code CVPLC28302 BX3100 RS485 COM2 Port Terminations are not neede...

Page 921: ...ide D Sub 25 pin male Order code CVPLC28502 KL6021 RS485 Terminations are not needed on cables of less than 5 meters and a transmission speed of less than 19200 Baud See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield PLC side terminals 16 18 470 Ω 1 4 W 15 4 5 RTS CTS 7 25 GND TxRx 22 10 TxRx 220 Ω 1 4 W 7 470 Ω 1 4 W VCC TxRxD TxRxD 3 8 VT side D Sub 25 pin male PLC side D Sub 9 pin female Order code CVP...

Page 922: ...pter 41 Connecting the cable shield RxD TxD RTS CTS GND 3 2 7 25 TxD RxD GND 4 5 15 18 3 2 5 VT side D Sub 25 pin male PLC side D Sub 9 pin female Max 15 m Order code CVPLC25102 NET2000 RS232 See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield RxD TxD RTS CTS GND 3 2 7 25 TxD RxD GND 3 2 5 4 5 15 18 VT side D Sub 25 pin male Traslator side D Sub 9 pin female Max 15 m Order code CVPLC20102 RPX 10 20 30 Usin...

Page 923: ... Connecting the cable shield Front View 16 470 Ω 1 4 W 7 25 GND Recive B 7 470 Ω 1 4 W VCC Tx 23 12 Tx RB 220 Ω 1 4 W Rx 13 SA 24 Rx SB 220 Ω 1 4 W Send A Send B 18 15 4 5 RTS CTS Recive A RA Frame GND FG VT side D Sub 25 pin male PLC side Order code CVPLC26102 Micrex F F705 Needs RS4 communication card NOTE To insert the termination resistances move the relevant switch to the ON position RS422 Se...

Page 924: ...tor Versamax using port 2 RS422 See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield PLC side D Sub 15 pin male RxD TxD RTS CTS GND 3 2 7 25 TxD RxD RTS CTS GND 2 3 4 5 7 SHD 1 4 5 15 18 VT side D Sub 25 pin male PLC side D Sub 25 pin male Max 15 m Order code CVPLC09202 Series 90 Using GE FANUC CMM311 interface port 1 port 2 RS232 CONFIGURATION OF CMM311 SNP only SNP Enable Yes SNP Mode Slave Interface RS23...

Page 925: ...9200 Timeout Long Parity Odd Stop bits 1 Flow control None TurnA delay None See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield PLC side D Sub 25 pin male RxD TxD RTS CTS GND 3 2 7 25 TxD RxD GND 4 3 1 2 8 4 5 15 18 RTS CTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SHD VT side D Sub 25 pin male PLC side RJ45 8 pin Max 15 m Order code CVPLC09402 Versamax using port 1 RS232 See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield Front View RxD Tx...

Page 926: ... 2 5 4 7 25 15 18 SD RD RS CS SG 3 2 7 8 5 VT side D Sub 25 pin male PLC side D Sub 9 pin male Max 15 m Order code CVPLC03202 Series EM CPU CPM E3 RS232 WARNING Switch ext to COM2 Switch n2 int to ON See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield RxD TxD CTS RTS GND 3 2 5 4 7 25 15 18 SD RD RS CS SG 4 8 2 3 6 2 3 1 4 5 6 7 8 VT side D Sub 25 pin male PLC side Minidin 8 pin male Max 15 m Order code CVP...

Page 927: ...LC side RJ45 8 pins Max 15 m Order code CVPLC03502 Series EH150 RS232 NOTE 127 PLCs connectable in Hitachi network with 2 Links 0 63 stations per Link LUMP TM See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield Parameter Default Values Notes L FF 01 02 or FF Address of Link number U FF 00 63 or FF Address of network node as indicated by the network card rotary switches M 00 00 63 Address of network node wi...

Page 928: ...0 Ω 1 4 W 7 0V 8 4 Tx 12Vdc 3 1 7 6 8 5 4 3 2 1 14 IKT 4 5 RTS CTS 7 GND Rx 25 VT side D Sub 25 pin male PLC side FUJITSU 8 pin female Max 200 m Order code CVPLC19102 CPU FA2 FA2J In the CPU programming connector Programmer s Port Current loop See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield Soldered End 16 18 470 Ω 1 4 W 15 4 5 RTS CTS 7 25 GND TxRx 22 7 TxRx 10 TxRx 8 TxRx 220 Ω 1 4 W 7 470 Ω 1 4 W 2 ...

Page 929: ...Soldered end 18 15 22 10 220 Ω 1 4 W 4 5 RTS CTS TxRx TxRx 7 7 25 GND A 3 B VT side D Sub 25 pin male PLC side D Sub 9 pin male Order code CVPLC12212 PS316 PS416 CPU400 RS485 N B Make sure that the two insertion jumpers of the interface termination resis tances located in the RS485 hatch visible on the front part of the PLC are hooked up see PLC manual See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield 18...

Page 930: ...32 See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield RxD TxD RTS CTS GND 3 2 7 25 SD RD SG 5 3 4 4 5 15 18 6 5 4 3 2 1 VT side D Sub 25 pin male PLC side RJ11 6 pins Max 15 m Order code CVPLC15102 Series KV10 16 24 40 RS232 Front View RxD TxD RTS CTS GND 3 2 7 25 Tx Rx GND 4 3 1 4 5 15 18 1 2 3 4 5 6 VT side D Sub 25 pin male PLC side RJ11 6 pins Max 15 m Order code CVPLC32102 DL 240 CPU Port RS232 See C...

Page 931: ...2 3 4 5 7 4 5 15 18 VT side D Sub 25 pin male PLC side D Sub 25 pin male Max 15 m Order code CVPLC32302 DL 405 DCM DL 405 CPU Port DL 305 DCU RS232 See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield 16 470 Ω 1 4 W 4 5 RTS CTS 7 25 GND IN IN 7 470 Ω 1 4 W VCC RTS CTS 10 12 RTS CTS 11 13 Tx 23 17 12 Tx 16 Rx 13 14 24 Rx 15 OUT OUT 7 GND 18 15 220 Ω 1 4 W 220 Ω 1 4 W VT side D Sub 25 pin male PLC side D Sub ...

Page 932: ...U RS232 See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield RxD TxD RTS CTS GND 3 2 7 25 TxD RxD GND 2 3 5 4 5 15 18 VT side Active D Sub 25 pin male PLC side D Sub 9 pin male Max 15 m Order code CVPLC07602 KUBES RS232 See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield RxD TxD RTS CTS GND 3 2 7 25 TxD RxD GND 3 2 5 4 5 15 18 VT side D Sub 25 pin male PLC side D Sub 9 pin male Order code CVPLC21102 K30 K500 K1000 R...

Page 933: ...e shield Max 15 m 16 18 470 Ω 1 4 W 15 4 5 RTS CTS 7 25 GND TxRx 22 10 TxRx 220 Ω 1 4 W 7 470 Ω 1 4 W TxRx GND TxRx SHD VT side D Sub 25 pin male PLC side terminals Order code CVPLC21302 Series MK RS485 See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield RxD TxD RTS CTS GND 3 2 7 25 TxD2 RxD2 SG 7 4 5 4 5 15 18 VT side D Sub 25 pin male PLC side D Sub 9 pin male Order code CVPLC21402 Master K1205 RS232 Dip...

Page 934: ...0 Ω 1 4 W VCC Tx 23 6 12 Tx 3 150 Ω 1 4 W Rx 13 5 24 Rx 2 150 Ω 1 4 W Tx Tx 4 1 2 5 8 3 7 6 VT side D Sub 25 pin male Order code CVPLC16102 Series FP 1 Directly in the CPU programming connector RS422 NOTA If you wish to use the AFP1523 cable it will be necessary to create an adaptor cable that on the VT side uses a 25 pin male D Sub with the pins arranged as in the figure on the PLC side a 15 pin ...

Page 935: ...r Link Station number 1 32 1 See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield RxD TxD RTS CTS GND 3 2 7 25 Rx 3 1 Tx 2 4 5 15 18 GND 5 4 2 3 1 VT side Active D Sub 25 pin male PLC side Minidin 5 pin male Max 15 m Order code CVPLC16302 Series FP M FP 0 FP 2 In the programming connector of the CPU Programmer s Port RS 232 See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield Soldered end 16 470 Ω 1 4 W 7 25 GND Rx R...

Page 936: ...0 Ω 1 4 W 15 4 5 RTS CTS 7 25 GND TxRx 22 10 TxRx 220 Ω 1 4 W 7 470 Ω 1 4 W SHD TxRx TxRx VCC VT side D Sub 25 pin male PLC side terminals Order code CVPLC31202 ML 14 RS485 See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield RxD TxD RTS CTS GND 3 2 7 25 TxD RxD GND 2 3 7 SHD 1 4 5 15 18 6 20 8 DSR DTR DCD RTS CTS 4 5 VT side D Sub 25 pin male Order code CVPLC05102 Series Fx Using Computer Link RS232 Jump c...

Page 937: ... 25 pin male Max 15 m Order code CVPLC05302 Series A CPU port Using the MITSUBISHI SC 05 converter for long distances Jump connect the LG and GF terminals on the PLC terminal block See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield 13 24 220 Ω 1 4 W Rx Rx 16 Tx 3 Tx 2 4 2K2 Ω 1 4 W Tx232 Rx 15 RTS 18 15 16 5 5V CTS 21 20 7 8 GND GND 4 DSR GND PWE 25 7 GND 2 Rx 17 DSR VT side D Sub 25 pin male Order code C...

Page 938: ... 15 18 VT side D Sub 25 pin male Order code CVPLC02102 Using interface 3G2A6 LK201 EV1 and OMRON series H C200H LK201 RS232 Jump connect the GR and LG terminals on the PLC terminal block See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield JUMPER SETTINGS C200H LK201 PLC side D Sub 25 pin male Max 15 m Rear fend jumpers Front end switches Off On 1 2 3 4 Cts 0V SW3 5 SW4 2 RxD TxD RTS CTS GND 3 2 7 25 TxD Rx...

Page 939: ...RxD GND 2 3 4 5 9 4 5 15 18 7 8 RTS CTS DSR DTR VT side D Sub 25 pin male Order code CVPLC02402 Series H Series CS1 CQM1 CPU 21 E and above CVM1 and C200HS HE HG HX Hα integrated serial CPM1 Using interface CPM1 CIF01 CPM2A 2C RS232 Jump connect the GR and LG terminals on the PLC terminal block See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield JUMPER SETTINGS CPM1 CIF01 HOST NT PLC side D Sub 9 pin male ...

Page 940: ... the cable shield PLC side D Sub 9 pin male RxD TxD RTS CTS GND 3 2 7 25 TxD RxD RTS CTS GND 2 3 4 5 9 SHD 1 4 5 15 18 VT side D Sub 25 pin male Order code CVPLC02502 CJ1G RS232 See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield PLC side D Sub 9 pin male Max 15 m RxD TxD 3 2 TxD RxD 3 2 SHD 1 15 18 GND 7 GND 5 25 6 DSR CTS 8 5 RTS 4 CTS VT side D Sub 25 pin male Order code CVPLC04102 Series PCD2 4 in the ...

Page 941: ... 9600 0 0 0 MODE SS1 DIAG F260 R500 NOTE Configure the Number of the S BUS station inside the PLC using the SAIA programming software See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield PLC side Terminals RxD TxD RTS CTS GND 3 2 7 25 TxD RxD GND 3 2 5 4 5 15 18 VT side D Sub 25 pin male Order code NOT CODED PCD2 4 in the programming connector of the CPU PGU port with port initialization RS232 This connecti...

Page 942: ...25 pin male Order code NOT CODED Additional PCD4 interface to BUS Current loop NB To make the terminal function with the additional interface of the SAIA PCD PLC the following setting must be observed SASI 1 1 first interf 2 second interf etc 999 TEXT 999 UART 9600 7 E 1 MODE SD0 DIAG F260 R500 RBUF 255 TBUF 255 See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield PLC side Terminals Max 15 m RxD TxD RTS CTS...

Page 943: ...l interface 2 module PCD2 F520 RS232 NB To make the terminal function with the additional interface of the SAIA PCD PLC the following setting must be observed SASI 1 1 first interf 2 second interf etc 999 TEXT 999 UART 9600 7 E 1 MODE SD0 DIAG F260 R500 RBUF 255 TBUF 255 See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield PLC side Terminals Max 15 m 16 18 470 Ω 1 4 W 15 4 5 RTS CTS 7 25 GND Rx Rx 7 470 Ω 1...

Page 944: ...apter 41 Connecting the cable shield PLC side Terminals 7 20mA Tx 14 9 20mA 15 Rx 18 Rx Tx 25 11 CTS 4 5 GND RTS SHD Rx 14 Rx 17 13 Tx 16 Tx VT side Active D Sub 25 pin male Order code NOT CODED PCD2 interface to module TTY 20mA PCD7 F130 Current loop See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield PLC side terminal RxD TxD RTS CTS GND 3 2 7 25 TxD RxD GND 3 2 7 4 5 15 18 VT side D Sub 25 pin male PLC ...

Page 945: ...he PLC CPLC serial port configuration Channel Configuration no B COMLI C Master Slave M S S Identity 1 247 1 ASCII Binary A B B Baudrate 110 19200 9600 Number of data bits 8 Number of stop bits 1 Parity O E N O Error counters to register RX N N Number of ACIA errors 12 Number of BCC errors 8 Number of other errors 4 See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield VT side D Sub 25 pin male PLC side Phoe...

Page 946: ...TX 23 12 13 24 15 18 RX 25 7 GND RTS 4 5 CTS 220 Ω 1 4 W 220 Ω 1 4 W RX RX TX SHD GND TX VT side D Sub 25 pin male PLC side Order code CVPLC08302 Series F Connection FCS RS422 N B Declare in the PLC program the type of port used See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield 7 20mA Tx 14 9 20mA 15 Rx 18 Rx Tx 25 11 CTS 4 5 GND RTS Rx 2 SHD 1 SHD 8 Rx 9 Tx 6 7 Tx VT side Active D Sub 25 pin male PLC si...

Page 947: ...of PLC 1 31 To have simultaneous communication between the PLC S7 programming pack age and the VT it is advisable to use the SIEMENS 6ES7972 OBB20 OXAO passing connector N B Max 50m without repeater See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield Max 50 m 7 20mA Tx 14 9 20mA 15 Rx 18 Rx Tx 25 11 CTS 4 5 GND RTS Rx 13 Rx 14 10 Tx 19 Tx VT side Active D Sub 25 pin male PLC side Passive D Sub 25 pin male ...

Page 948: ...MPI Address of VT 1 31 Address of PLC 1 31 Instead of using a 9 pin connector and integrating the resistances the following Si emens connectors can be used with resistances already integrated and insertable with a sliding switch SIEMENS 6ES7972 0BA10 0XA0 SIEMENS 6ES7972 0BA40 0XA0 SIEMENS 6GK1500 0EA00 For simultaneous communication between the programming package the PLC S7 and the VT you are ad...

Page 949: ... 1 4 W 4k7 Ω 1 4 W Rx 7 2 GND 1 Tx Tx 390 Ω 1 4 W 25 3 7 8 5 6 1N4148 VT side D Sub 25 pin male PLC side D Sub 9 pin male Order code CVPLC13102 Series 400 500 600 RS422 See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield Rx 18 11 9 Tx TX SHD 0V Rx 6 2 SHD 560 Ω 1 4 W 7 0V 8 4 Tx 12Vdc 3 1 7 6 8 5 4 3 2 1 14 IKT 4 5 RTS CTS 7 GND Rx 25 VT side D Sub 25 pin male PLC side FUJITSU 8 pin female Max 200 m Order ...

Page 950: ...Sub 9 pin male Order code CVPLC11202 TSX47 67 87 107 Current loop NOTE The max length of the cable depends on which version of the Telemeca nique CPU hardware is being used With versions of hardware coded lower than V3 E g CPU 47 11 47 20 the length of the cable is limited to 3 meters given that the serial port of the CPU is not optoisolated In this case whenever you need to create a cable longer ...

Page 951: ...70 Ω 1 4 W 2 3 1 4 5 6 7 8 8 TxRx 2 GND VT side D Sub 25 pin male Order code CVPLC11702 TSX07 37 57 UNITELWAY Twido Porta MODBUS RS485 Point to point connection Address of VT 4 31 Address of PLC N 0 Address of PLC module 254 See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield PLC side Microdin 8 pin male Soldered end 16 18 470 Ω 1 4 W 15 4 5 RTS CTS 7 25 GND TxRx 22 10 TxRx 220 Ω 1 4 W 7 470 Ω 1 4 W 10 TxR...

Page 952: ... 254 See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield 22 10 TxRx TxRx 18 15 4 5 RTS CTS 7 25 GND 22 10 TxRx TxRx 18 15 4 5 RTS CTS 7 25 GND TxRx 7 4 n Last 2 3 1 4 5 6 7 8 TxRx 8 GND 2 16 18 470 Ω 1 4 W 15 4 5 RTS CTS 7 25 GND TxRx 22 10 TxRx 220 Ω 1 4 W 7 470 Ω 1 4 W PLC side Minidin 8 pin male Order code NOT CODED TSX07 37 UNITELWAY RS485 Cable valid for several VTs connected to a single Master PLC Ad...

Page 953: ...2 15 TxRx 14 TxRx 7 16 18 470 Ω 1 4 W 15 4 5 RTS CTS 7 25 GND TxRx 22 10 TxRx 220 Ω 1 4 W 7 470 Ω 1 4 W PLC side D Sub 15 pin male Order code NOT CODED TSX17 UNITELWAY RS485 Cable valid for several VTs connected to a single Master PLC Address of VT 4 31 Address of PLC N 0 Address of PLC module 254 See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield VT side D Sub 25 pin male ...

Page 954: ...7 use programming software to param etrize the PLC as Slave assigning the chosen address and jump connecting pins 2 and 6 on the connector connecting to the network In the case of PLCs TSX17 TSX47 TSX67 and TSX87 refer to the PLC man ual to see which pins to jump connect on the network connector to assign the chosen Slave address See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield VT side D Sub 25 pin male...

Page 955: ... 7 330 Ω 1 4 W VCC Tx 23 12 Tx Rx 13 24 Rx 150 Ω 1 4 W 23 18 19 11 RTS CTS 18 15 4 5 RTS CTS 100 Ω 1 4 W 220 Ω 1 4 W Data IN Data IN 9 10 14 16 Data OUT Data OUT RTS CTS VT side D Sub 25 pin male PLC side D Sub 25 pin male Order code CVPLC06302 Series 400 CPU 435 RS422 NB Set the protocol in ASCII mode AUX function of TISOFT from version 1 2 upwards See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield RxD T...

Page 956: ... with lower hardware version see cable CVPLC06202 See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield 7 20mA Tx 14 9 20mA 15 Rx 18 Rx Tx 25 11 CTS 4 5 GND RTS Rx 8 Rx 3 7 Tx 4 Tx 7 6 8 5 4 3 2 1 VT side Active D Sub 25 pin male PLC side Passive FUJITSU 8 pin male Order code CVPLC10102 EX 100 CPU M20 M40 In the CPU programming connector Programmer s Port Current loop See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shie...

Page 957: ...able shield Max 15 m RxD TxD RTS CTS GND 3 2 7 25 TxD RxD GND 4 5 15 18 3 2 5 VT side D Sub 25 pin male SCALES side D Sub 9 pin female Max 15 m Order code NOT CODED WE2110 RS232 See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield 16 18 470 Ω 1 4 W 15 4 5 RTS CTS 7 25 GND TxRx 22 9 10 TxRx 6 220 Ω 1 4 W 7 470 Ω 1 4 W 7 8 RB TB RA TA VT side D Sub 25 pin male Order code NOT CODED WE2110 RS485 See Chapter 41 ...

Page 958: ...32 See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield Thermoreg side Terminals Max 15 m RxD TxD RTS CTS GND 3 2 7 25 4 5 15 18 T SHD R R T VT side D Sub 25 pin male Order code NOT CODED 800 1600 1800 RS232 See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield Thermoreg side Terminals Max 3 5 m 7 20mA Tx 14 9 20mA 15 Rx 18 Rx Tx 25 11 CTS 4 5 GND RTS SHD R R T T VT side D Sub 25 pin male Order code NOT CODED 800 1600...

Page 959: ... Ω 1 4 W 15 7 25 22 10 220 Ω 1 4 W 7 470 Ω 1 4 W 4 5 RTS CTS GND TxRx Tx TxRx Tx VCC SHD Rx Rx VT side D Sub 25 pin male Order code NOT CODED 800 1600 1800 RS485 Only applies to protocol of Modbus Ser p 1 See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield Thermoreg side Terminals 16 18 470 Ω 1 4 W 15 7 25 22 10 220 Ω 1 4 W 7 470 Ω 1 4 W 4 5 RTS CTS GND TxRx 12 B TxRx 11 A VCC SHD VT side D Sub 25 pin male...

Page 960: ...Thermoreg side Terminals RxD TxD RTS CTS GND 3 2 7 25 Tx Rx GND 3 2 5 4 5 15 18 6 5 4 3 2 1 SHD VT side D Sub 25 pin male Thermoreg side RJ11 6 pins Max 15 m Order code NOT CODED MLC9000 Intrabus RS232 See Chapter 41 Connecting the cable shield Front View 16 18 470 Ω 1 4 W 15 4 5 RTS CTS 7 25 GND TxRx 22 10 TxRx 220 Ω 1 4 W 7 470 Ω 1 4 W 4 3 5 SHD A wire B wire Comm VT side D Sub 25 pin male Therm...

Page 961: ...CVPLC17102 COMPACT A120 A250 232 CVPLC17202 MICRO 232 ALLEN BRADLEY CVPLC07112 SLC500 CPU 5 02 5 03 485 CVPLC07202 PLC5 11 20 30 40 40L 60 60L 232 CVPLC07302 PLC5 11 20 30 40 40L 60 60L 422 CVPLC07402 SLC500 5 03 04 05 Micrologix CPU5550 ControlLogix 232 CVPLC07502 Protection device for DH485 485 CVPLC07602 MICROLOGIX CPU1000 1200 and 1500 232 ALTUS CVPLC27102 ALNET 1 232 CVPLC27202 ALNET 1 232 CV...

Page 962: ...CPU400 485 CVPLC12302 PS4 141 MM1 PS4 201 MM1 PS4 341 MM1 232 CVPLC12402 PS416 CPU400 232 KEYENCE CVPLC15102 KV10 16 24 40 232 KOYO CVPLC32102 DL 240 CPU Port 232 CVPLC32202 DL 340 CPU Port 232 CVPLC32302 DL 405 DCM DL 405 CPU Port DL 305 DCU 232 CVPLC32402 DL 405 DCM DL 305 DCU 422 CVPLC32502 DL 305 DCU 232 KUHNKE CVPLC07602 KUBES 232 LG CVPLC21102 K30 K500 K1000 232 CVPLC21202 K10 232 CVPLC21302...

Page 963: ...02 S5 AG90 135 FAP S5 944 945 C L CVPLC01402 S7 200 300 400 485 CVPLC01502 FAP S5 928B C L SPRECHER SCHUH CVPLC03102 SPRECHER SCHUH 232 SQUARE D CVPLC13102 Series 400 500 600 422 CVPLC19102 Series 50 C L TELEMECANIQUE CVPLC1Q102 Adaptor PLC TSX17 RS485 C L Supplied by ESA C L CVPLC11002 TSX47 UNITELWAY module TSXSCM21 485 CVPLC11102 CVPLC1Q102 C L CVPLC11202 TSX47 67 87 107 C L CVPLC11602 TSX17 UN...

Page 964: ......

Page 965: ...0 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 42 1 Chapter 42 Resistance to chemical substances Contents Page Chemical substances 42 2 Cleaning the VT 42 7 Case for terminals VT H Series 42 7 This chapter consists of 8 pages ...

Page 966: ...ard Two cotton wool balls with different substances were placed separately on each keyboard this was then put in a Petri dish and kept at a temperature of 25 C for an hour after this the keyboard was washed in water and dried The keyboard was observed and the results classified as follows A No visible deterioration B Very slight deterioration C Some deterioration D Gross damage visible The substan...

Page 967: ... 24h 24h Blown castor oil NS 24h Carbon dioxide NS E Castor oil NS 24h 24h 24h Caustic soda 2 24h 24h 24h 10 24h 50 B Caustic solution CO O O O Chloric acid NS A Chlorine NS G Legend A No visible degradation B Very slight degradation C Slight degradation D Damage visible or gross E Unlimited use F Limitated use G Use inad visable S The surface melts X The surface blisters O The surface is destroye...

Page 968: ...cid NS 1h 1h Table 42 1 Chemical resistance data sheet Part 2 of 5 Substance Parts of the VT Accessories Resis tance Epoxy powder coating 3 Matt keyboard surface 2 Transpar ent key board surface 1 Touch screen 2 Protective glass Gaskets Protective 2 film Legend A No visible degradation B Very slight degradation C Slight degradation D Damage visible or gross E Unlimited use F Limitated use G Use in...

Page 969: ...ble 42 1 Chemical resistance data sheet Part 3 of 5 Substance Parts of the VT Accessories Resis tance Epoxy powder coating 3 Matt keyboard surface 2 Transpar ent key board surface 1 Touch screen 2 Protective glass Gaskets Protective 2 film Legend A No visible degradation B Very slight degradation C Slight degradation D Damage visible or gross E Unlimited use F Limitated use G Use inad visable S Th...

Page 970: ...Chemical resistance data sheet Part 4 of 5 Substance Parts of the VT Accessories Resis tance Epoxy powder coating 3 Matt keyboard surface 2 Transpar ent key board surface 1 Touch screen 2 Protective glass Gaskets Protective 2 film Legend A No visible degradation B Very slight degradation C Slight degradation D Damage visible or gross E Unlimited use F Limitated use G Use inad visable S The surface...

Page 971: ...24h4 24h4 Washing powders NS 24h 24h E 24h Water NS 24h E White spirit NS 3Y A Windex NS 24h4 24h4 Wisk NS 24h4 24h4 Wood oil NS F Xilene NS 1Y 24h 24h Table 42 1 Chemical resistance data sheet Part 5 of 5 Substance Parts of the VT Accessories Resis tance Epoxy powder coating 3 Matt keyboard surface 2 Transpar ent key board surface 1 Touch screen 2 Protective glass Gaskets Protective 2 film Legend...

Page 972: ...enerally stable to water weak acid and mineral oil Mechani cal properties and surface appearance however can be deteriorated if a molded part is exposed to hot water strong acid alkalis Ketones and aro matic hydrocarbons etc Make sure the plastic shell does not come into contact with any oils containing paraffin clorurate or active nitrogen These sub stances may change the mechanical qualities of ...

Page 973: ...405 1200 037 2 Rel 2 21 of 25 02 2008 43 1 Chapter 43 Technical support Contents Page International Customer Care 43 2 International Product Returns 43 2 This chapter consists of a total of 4 pages ...

Page 974: ...of the form to accompany the product Our International Customer Care service will supply all the necessary infor mation for returning a an item Thank you for your kind co operation IMPORTANT NOTE ESA elettronica S p A will accept goods carriage free freight prepaid transport at customer s cost goods carriage forward freight collect transport paid by ESA only with the prior authorization of the com...

Page 975: ...LS S N Product Town County Post Code Compiled by Company Full address Customer details must be filled in Tel no Fax Name Contact person where different from above Tel no Fax Device connected Information regarding problem must be filled in Detailed description of the problem and the circumstances under which it occurs Notes ...

Page 976: ......

Search results

Summary of Contents for VT130W

Reviews:

Related manuals for VT130W

Brands by name

Popular brands

ESA VT130W, Hardware Manual

Search results

Summary of Contents for VT130W

Reviews:

Related manuals for VT130W

Brands by name

Popular brands